1 - Jeep

1 - Jeep
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
INTRODUCTION
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5
STARTING AND OPERATING
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
10
INDEX
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
1
2
1
INTRODUCTION
• INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• ROLLOVER WARNING . . . . . . . . . . .
• IMPORTANT NOTICE . . . . . . . . . . . .
• HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . .
• WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . .
• VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . .
• VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4
4
5
6
8
8
8
3
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler
Group LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials that are
traditional to our vehicles.
This is a specialized utility vehicle, it can go
places and perform tasks for which conventional two–wheel drive vehicles were not intended. It handles and maneuvers differently
from many passenger cars both on-road and
off-road, so take time to become familiar with
your vehicle.
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the
Owner’s Manual and all the Supplements. Be
sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls,
particularly those used for braking, steering,
and transmission and transfer case shifting.
Learn how your vehicle handles on different
road surfaces. Your driving skills will improve
with experience, but as in driving any vehicle,
take it easy as you begin. When driving off-road
or working the vehicle, don’t overload it or
expect it to overcome the forces of nature.
Always observe local laws wherever you drive.
4
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to
operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss
of control or a collision. Be sure to read the
“On-Road/ Off-Road Driving Tips” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
NOTE:
After you read the manual, it should be
stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain with the vehicle when
sold so that the new owner will be aware of
all safety warnings.
Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may
result in loss of control or a collision.
Operating this vehicle at excessive speeds or
while intoxicated may result in loss of control,
collision with other vehicles or objects, going
off the road, or overturning; any of which may
lead to serious injury or death. Also, failure to
use seat belts subjects the driver and passengers to a greater risk of injury or death.
To keep your vehicle running at its best, have
your vehicle serviced at recommended intervals by an authorized dealer or distributor who
has the qualified personnel, special tools and
equipment to perform all service.
The manufacturer and its distributors are vitally
interested in your complete satisfaction with
this vehicle. If you encounter a service or
warranty problem which is not resolved to your
satisfaction, discuss the matter with your authorized dealer or distributor’s management.
Your authorized dealer or distributor will be
happy to assist you with any questions about
your vehicle.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. This
vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a
higher center of gravity than many passenger
cars. It is capable of performing better in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in
an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of
control. Because of the higher center of gravity
and the narrower track, if this vehicle is out of
control it may roll over when some other vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers,
or other unsafe driving actions that can cause
loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this
vehicle safely may result in a collision, rollover
of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive
carefully.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
ALL MATERIAL CONTAINED IN THIS PUBLICATION IS BASED ON THE LATEST INFORMATION AVAILABLE AT TIME OF PUBLICATION
APPROVAL. THE RIGHT IS RESERVED TO
PUBLISH REVISIONS AT ANY TIME.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with
the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and
maintenance of your new vehicle. It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and
various customer-oriented documents. You are
urged to read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations
in this Owner’s Manual will help assure safe
and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
Rollover Warning Label
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat
belts provided is a major cause of severe or
fatal injury. In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to die than a
person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
The manufacturer reserves the right to make
changes in design and specifications, and/or
to make additions to or improvements in its
products without imposing any obligations
upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
The Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes
the features that are standard or available as
extra cost options. Therefore, some of the
equipment and accessories in this publication
may not appear on your vehicle.
NOTE:
Be sure to read the Owner’s Manual first
before driving your vehicle and before attaching or installing parts/accessories or
making other modifications to the vehicle.
After you have read the Owner’s Manual, it
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient
reference and remain with the vehicle when
sold.
5
In view of the many replacement parts and
accessories from various manufacturers available on the market, the manufacturer cannot be
certain that the driving safety of your vehicle
will not be impaired by the attachment or installation of such parts. Even if such parts are
officially-approved (for example, by a general
operating permit for the part or by constructing
the part in an officially approved design), or if
an individual operating permit was issued for
the vehicle after the attachment or installation
of such parts, it cannot be implicitly assumed
that the driving safety of your vehicle is unimpaired. Therefore, neither experts nor official
agencies are liable. Therefore the manufacturer
only assumes responsibility when parts, which
are expressly authorized or recommended by
the manufacturer, are attached or installed at
an authorized dealer. The same applies when
modifications to the original condition are subsequently made on the manufacturer’s vehicles.
6
Your warranties do not cover any part that the
manufacturer did not supply. Nor do they cover
the cost of any repairs or adjustments that
might be caused or needed because of the
installation or use of non-manufacturer parts,
components, equipment, materials, or additives. Nor do your warranties cover the costs of
repairing damage or conditions caused by any
changes to your vehicle that do not comply with
the manufacturers specifications.
Original Mopar姞 parts and accessories and
other products approved by the manufacturer,
including qualified advice, are available at your
authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that your
authorized dealer knows your vehicle best, has
the factory-trained technicians and genuine
Mopar姞 parts, and is interested in your satisfaction.
Copyright © 2010 Chrysler International.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine
which section contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends
on the items of equipment ordered, certain
descriptions and illustrations may differ from
your vehicle’s equipment
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s
Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of
the symbols that may be used on your vehicle
or throughout this Owner’s Manual:
7
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS
against operating procedures that could result
in a collision or bodily injury. It also contains
CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not
read this entire manual, you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and
Cautions.
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is
found on the left front corner of the instrument
panel pad, visible from outside of the vehicle
through the windshield. This number also appears on the right side frame rail and the
Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle. Save this
label for a convenient record of your vehicle
identification number and optional equipment.
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN plate.
8
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/
ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle
could seriously affect its roadworthiness and
safety and may lead to a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING
YOUR VEHICLE
• A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• STEERING WHEEL LOCK — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .
• To Manually Lock the Steering Wheel . . . . . . .
• To Release the Steering Wheel Lock . . . . . . . .
• Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock System
• SENTRY KEY姞 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . .
• General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . . .
• Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
13
13
13
13
13
13
14
14
14
15
15
15
15
15
16
9
• ILLUMINATED ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF EQUIPPED . .
• To Unlock The Doors And Swing Gate . . . . . . . .
• To Lock The Doors And Swing Gate . . . . . . . . .
• To Turn Off “Flash Lights With Lock” . . . . . . . .
• Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . .
• General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .
• DOORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Upper Half Door Window Removal — If Equipped .
• Upper Half Door Window Installation — If Equipped
• Front Door Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Rear Door Removal (Four-Door Models) . . . . . .
• DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Power Door Locks — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .
• Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit . . . . . . . . . . .
• Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors
• WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Power Windows — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16
16
16
17
17
17
17
18
18
18
19
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
• REAR SWING GATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Rear Center Lap/Shoulder Belt Retractor Lockout
(Four-Door Models Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . .
• Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . .
• Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . . .
• Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert姞)
• Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Airbags . . .
• Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . . . . .
• Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . . . . . . .
• Additional Requirements For Diesel Engine — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . 24
. . . 24
. . . 25
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
28
28
28
29
. . .
. . .
. .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
30
30
30
31
31
34
38
38
47
. . . 48
11
• SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle .
• Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make OutsideThe
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
48
48
48
49
. . . 50
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
3. Push the ignition key inward.
The keys for your new vehicle are enclosed in a
plastic bag with the key code number on it. If
you received your keys without the bag, ask
your authorized dealer to give you the number.
The key code can also be obtained by your
authorized dealer from your vehicle invoice.
4. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position,
and remove the key.
Ignition Key Removal
1. Place the shift lever in PARK (if equipped
with an automatic transmission).
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC (ACCESSORY) position.
WARNING!
Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal, or the shift lever. Do not leave the key
in the ignition. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.
Always remove the key from the ignition, and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Ignition Switch Positions
1 — LOCK
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON/RUN
4 — START
NOTE:
The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds
when the ignition key is placed in the LOCK
or ACC position.
STEERING WHEEL LOCK — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a passive
steering wheel lock. This lock prevents steering
the vehicle without the ignition key. If the steering wheel is moved approximately a half turn in
either direction, and the key is not in the ignition, the steering wheel will lock.
To Manually Lock the Steering
Wheel
With the engine running, rotate the steering
wheel one–half revolution from the straight
ahead position, turn off the engine, and remove
the key. Rotate the steering wheel slightly in
both directions until the lock engages.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
To Release the Steering Wheel Lock
Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the
ignition, sounds a signal to remind you to
remove the key.
Insert the key in the ignition, and turn the wheel
slightly to the left or right, to disengage the lock.
13
NOTE:
If you turned the wheel to the right to engage
the lock, you must turn the wheel slightly to
the right to disengage it. If you turned the
wheel to the left to engage the lock, turn the
wheel slightly to the left to disengage it.
Automatic Transmission Ignition
Interlock System
This system prevents the key from being removed unless the shift lever is in PARK. It also
prevents shifting out of PARK unless the key is
in the ON/RUN position, and the brake pedal is
depressed.
SENTRY KEY姞
The Sentry Key姞 Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling
the engine. The system does not need to be
armed or activated. Operation is automatic,
regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or
unlocked.
The system uses ignition keys, which have an
embedded electronic chip (transponder), to
prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are programmed to the
14
vehicle can be used to start and operate the
vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in
two seconds if someone uses an invalid key to
start the engine.
NOTE:
A key, which has not been programmed, is
also considered an invalid key even if it is
cut to fit the ignition switch lock cylinder for
that vehicle.
During normal operation, after turning on the
ignition switch, the Vehicle Security Light will
turn on for three seconds for a bulb check. If
the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash
after the bulb check, it indicates that someone
used an invalid key to start the engine. Either of
these conditions will result in the engine being
shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during
normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for
longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there
is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur,
have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible
by an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key姞 Immobilizer system is not
compatible with some after-market remote
starting systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
security protection.
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle
have been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE:
Only keys that have been programmed to
the vehicle electronics can be used to start
the vehicle. Once a Sentry Key姞 has been
programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
Always remove Sentry Keys from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is
provided with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN). Keep the PIN in a secure
location. This number is required for authorized
dealer replacement of keys. Duplication of keys
consists of programming a blank key to the
vehicle electronics. A blank key is one which
has never been programmed. See your authorized dealer if you require replacement or additional keys for your vehicle.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key姞 Immobilizer
system serviced, bring all vehicle keys with
you to the authorized dealer.
Customer Key Programming
See your authorized dealer if you require replacement or additional keys for your vehicle.
General Information
The Sentry Key姞 operates on a carrier frequency of 433.92 MHz. The Sentry Key姞 Immobilizer system will be used in the following
European countries, which apply Directive
1999/5/EC: Austria, Belgium, Czech Republic,
Denmark, Finland, France, Germany, Greece,
Hungary, Ireland, Italy, Luxembourg, Nether-
lands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania,
Russian Federation, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden,
Switzerland, Yugoslavia, and United Kingdom.
five second delay for another 30 seconds. If the
trigger remains present this cycle will repeat for
up to five minutes.
Operation is subject to the following conditions:
To Arm The System
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
1. Remove the key from the ignition switch and
exit the vehicle.
• This device must accept any interference
that may be received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
2. Lock the doors and liftgate by pressing the
power door LOCK switch or the LOCK button
on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF
EQUIPPED
NOTE:
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if
you lock the doors with the manual door
lock plungers or the driver’s door lock cylinder.
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle
doors, hood, swing gate, and ignition for unauthorized operation.
If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle
Security Alarm will sound the horn intermittently, flash the headlights and taillights, and
flash the Vehicle Security Light in the cluster.
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle
Security Alarm will signal with the siren for
30 seconds. If the triggering device is not
deactivated the siren will sound again after a
3. Close all the doors.
The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument
cluster will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to
signal that the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming.
During this period, opening any door or the
swing gate will cancel the arming process. If
the Vehicle Security Alarm arms successfully,
the Vehicle Security Light will flash at a slower
rate to indicate the alarm is set.
15
To Disarm The System
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter or insert a valid Sentry Key姞 into the
ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the
ON/RUN position.
The interior lights will come on when you open
any door.
NOTE:
• Unlocking the doors with the manual door
lock plungers or the driver’s door lock
cylinder will not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is
armed, the interior power door lock
switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle; however, you can create
conditions where the Vehicle Security Alarm will
give you a false alarm. If the previously described arming sequence has occurred, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of
whether you are inside or outside the vehicle. If
you remain inside the vehicle and open a door,
the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
Vehicle Security Alarm.
16
The lights will remain on after all of the doors
are closed, and then fade to off or they will
immediately fade to off once the ignition switch
is turned on.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) —
IF EQUIPPED
This system allows you to lock or unlock the
doors and swing gate from distances approximately 35 ft (11 m) using a hand-held Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the
vehicle to activate the system.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter
NOTE:
The line of transmission must not be
blocked with metal objects.
To Unlock The Doors And Swing
Gate
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the
RKE transmitter once to unlock only the driver’s
door or twice to unlock all the doors and swing
gate. When the UNLOCK button is pressed, the
illuminated entry will turn on, and the parking
lights will flash on twice.
The system can be programmed to unlock all
the doors upon the first UNLOCK button press
by using the following procedure:
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter.
2. Continue to hold the LOCK button at least
4 seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds,
then press and hold the UNLOCK button on the
RKE transmitter.
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle,
by pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK button on the
RKE transmitter.
NOTE:
Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are inside the vehicle will
activate the Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening
a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press
the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm.
5. If the desired programming was not
achieved or to reactivate this feature, repeat
the above steps.
To Lock The Doors And Swing Gate
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE
transmitter to lock all doors. The turn signals
will flash and the horn will chirp once to acknowledge the lock signal.
To Turn Off “Flash Lights With
Lock”
NOTE:
The “Flash Lights With Lock” feature can be
turned on or off using the following steps:
1. Press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button
for 4 to 10 seconds.
2. While the UNLOCK button is pressed, (after
four seconds) press the RKE transmitter LOCK
button. Release both buttons.
3. Test the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature
outside of the vehicle, by pressing the RKE
transmitter LOCK button with the ignition in the
LOCK position, and the key removed.
NOTE:
Pressing the RKE transmitter LOCK button
while you are in the vehicle will activate the
Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with
the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will
cause the alarm to sound. Press the RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button to deactivate
the Vehicle Security Alarm.
The “Flash Lights With Lock” feature can be
reactivated by repeating this procedure.
Programming Additional
Transmitters
Refer to Sentry Key姞 “Customer Key Programming.”
If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter, contact your authorized dealer for details.
General Information
Transmitter and receivers operate on a carrier
frequency of 433.92 MHz as required by EEC
regulations. These devices must be certified to
conform to specific regulations in each individual country. Two sets of regulations are
involved: ETS (European Telecommunication
Standard) 300–220, which most countries use,
and German BZT federal regulation 225Z125,
which is based on ETC 300–220 but has additional unique requirements. Other defined re17
quirements are noted in ANNEX VI of COMMISSION DIRECTIVE 95/56/EC. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
two halves of the RKE transmitter apart. Use
extreme care not to damage the seal or internal components.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a
radio station tower, airport transmitter, and
some mobile or CB radios.
CAUTION!
Careless handling and storage of the removable door panels may damage the seals,
causing water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
Upper Half Door Window Removal
— If Equipped
If your Remote Lock Control fails to operate
from a normal distance, check for these two
conditions.
1. Weak battery in transmitter. The expected
life of the battery is a minimum of three years.
DOORS
1. Grasp the half door window and pull upward.
Separating RKE Key Fob Halves
Transmitter Battery Replacement
2. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid
touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin
oils may cause battery deterioration. If you
touch a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
The recommended replacement battery is
CR2032.
3. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap
the two halves together.
1. With the RKE transmitter buttons facing
down, use a flat blade screw driver to pry the
Upper Half Door Window
18
Upper Half Door Window Installation
— If Equipped
1. Grasp the half door window and line up pins
into pockets in lower door.
2. Push down to ensure the half door window is
fully seated.
Front Door Removal
1. Remove the hinge pin screws from the upper and lower outside hinges (using a #T50
Torx姞 head driver).
Hinge Pin Screw
2. Unplug the wiring harness connector under
the instrument panel by pressing the tab at the
side of the connector and pulling to disconnect.
NOTE:
If the red latch on the connector is locked,
push the red latch to the right until you can
only see the latch on one end (right) of the
connector. This will unlock the connector
tab, allowing the tab to be pressed down and
enabling the harness to be disconnected.
1 — Harness Connector
2 — Body Hook
3 — Door/Harness Strap
3. Unhook the door strap from the body hook.
Be careful not to allow the door to swing fully
open as the mirror may damage paint.
4. With the door open, lift the door to clear
hinge pins from their hinges, and remove door.
To reinstall the door(s), perform the previous
steps in the opposite order.
Rear Door Removal (Four-Door
Models)
1. Remove the hinge pin screws from the upper and lower outside hinges (using a #T50
Torx姞 head driver).
Hinge Pin Screw
19
2. Slide front seat(s) fully forward.
NOTE:
The ignition key that is used to start the
vehicle is used to lock or unlock the doors,
swing gate, and console storage.
3. Remove the trim access door from the bottom of B-pillar.
Red Connector Latch
5. Unhook the door strap from the body hook.
Trim Access Door
4. Unplug the wiring harness connector.
NOTE:
If the red latch on the connector is locked,
push the red latch to the right until you can
only see the latch on one end (right) of the
connector. This will unlock the connector
tab, allowing the tab to be pressed down and
enabling the harness to be disconnected.
20
6. With the door open, lift the door to clear
hinge pins from their hinges, and remove door.
To reinstall the door(s), perform the previous
steps in the opposite order.
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
The front (two-door models) and rear doors
(four-door models) are equipped with a rockertype interior door lock. To lock the door when
leaving your vehicle, press the LOCK position
and close the door.
Manual Door Lock
WARNING!
• For personal security reasons and safety in
an accident, lock the vehicle doors when
you drive, as well as when you park and
leave the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle.
Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key in the ignition. A
child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
Power Door Locks — If Equipped
The door lock switch is located on each front
door panel. Press the switch forward to lock the
doors, and rearward to unlock the doors.
WARNING!
• For personal security reasons and safety in
an accident, lock the vehicle doors when
you drive, as well as when you park and
leave the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle.
Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key in the ignition. A
child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
Programming
The “Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit” feature
can be enabled or disabled as follows:
1. Close all doors and place the key in the
ignition.
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK
and ON/RUN and then back to LOCK four
times ending up in the LOCK position.
3. Press the power door unlock switch to unlock the doors.
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles
with power door locks if:
4. A single chime will indicate the completion
of the programming.
1. The “Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit” feature is enabled.
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this
feature to its previous setting.
2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
NOTE:
Use the “Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit”
feature in accordance with local laws.
3. The transmission shift lever is in NEUTRAL
or PARK.
Power Door Lock Switch
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
4. The driver door is opened.
21
Automatic Door Locks
The doors will lock automatically on vehicles
with power door locks if all of the following
conditions are met:
3. Press the power door LOCK switch to lock
the doors.
4. A single chime will indicate the completion
of the programming.
1. The “Automatic Door Locks” feature is enabled.
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this
feature to its previous setting.
2. The transmission is in gear.
4. The throttle is pressed.
NOTE:
Use the “Automatic Door Locks” feature in
accordance with local laws.
5. The vehicle speed is above 15 mph
(24 km/h).
Child-Protection Door Lock System
— Rear Doors
6. The doors were not previously locked using
the power door lock switch or Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats, the rear doors are
equipped with Child-Protection Door Lock system.
Automatic Door Locks Programming
The “Automatic Door Locks” feature can be
enabled or disabled as follows:
To engage or disengage the ChildProtection Door Lock system
3. All doors are closed.
1. Close all doors and place the key in the
ignition.
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK
and ON/RUN and then back to LOCK four
times ending up in the LOCK position.
22
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the ignition key into the lock
and rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear
door.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision. Remember that the rear doors can only
be opened from the outside when the ChildProtection locks are engaged.
NOTE:
For emergency exit with the system engaged, move the rocker lever rearward (unlocked position), roll down the window and
open the door with the outside door handle.
WINDOWS
Power Windows — If Equipped
The power window switches are located on the
instrument panel below the radio. Press the
switch downward to open the window and
upward to close the window.
Power Window Switches
The top left switch controls the left front window
and the top right switch controls the right front
window.
NOTE:
The switches will continue to function for up
to two minutes after the ignition key has
been removed, or until a front door is
opened.
Four-Door Models
The lower left switch controls the left rear passenger window, and the lower right switch
controls the right rear passenger window.
Window Lockout Switch — Four-Door
Models
The window lockout switch (located between
the front window switches) allows you to disable the rear window switches that are located
on the back of the center floor console. To
disable the window controls, press the window
lockout button downward. To enable the window controls, press the window lockout button
upward.
Auto-Down
Both the driver and front passenger window
switches have an “Auto-Down” feature. Press
the window switch past the first detent, release,
and the window will go down automatically. To
cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate the
switch in either the up or down direction and
release the switch.
To stop the window from going all the way down
during the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the
switch briefly.
Window Lockout Switch
To partially open the window, press halfway to
the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
23
Rear Power Windows — Four-Door Models
The rear passenger window switches are located on the back of the center floor console.
Press the switch downward to open the window
and upward to close the window.
REAR SWING GATE
The swing gate can be unlocked by using the
key, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or
by activating the power door lock switches
located on the front doors.
To open the swing gate, press the button on the
gate handle.
CAUTION!
Do not press on rear wiper blade when closing
the rear flip-up window, as damage to the
blade will result.
WARNING!
Driving with the flip-up window open can allow
poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle.
You and your passengers could be injured by
these fumes. Keep the flip-up window closed
when you are operating the vehicle.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in
your vehicle are the restraint systems:
Rear Power Window Switches (Four-Door
Models)
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicoptertype sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit
wind buffeting with the windows down in certain open or partially open positions. This is a
normal occurrence and can be minimized by
adjusting window opening.
24
Gate Handle
NOTE:
Close the rear flip-up window before attempting to close the swing gate (hard top
models only).
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for the
driver and all passengers
• Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front
passenger
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags
(SAB) — if equipped
• An energy-absorbing steering column and
steering wheel
• Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners to
enhance occupant protection by managing
occupant energy during an impact event
• All seat belt systems (except the driver’s)
include Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALRs), which lock the seat belt webbing into
position by extending the belt all the way out
and then adjusting the belt to the desired
length to restrain a child seat or secure a
large item in a seat — if equipped
If you will be carrying children too small for
adult-sized seat belts, the seat belts or the
ISOFIX feature also can be used to hold infant
and child restraint systems. For more information, refer to ISOFIX — Child Seat Anchorage
System.
NOTE:
The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design. This allows the airbag
to have different rates of inflation based on
the severity and type of collision.
Please pay close attention to the information in
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
system properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
WARNING!
In an accident, you and your passengers can
suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. You can strike the interior
of your vehicle or other passengers, or you
can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be
sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent
driver, even on short trips. Someone on the
road may be a poor driver and cause an
accident that includes you. This can happen far
away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives,
and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries
in an accident. Some of the worst injuries
happen when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor
vehicle should be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are
equipped with lap/shoulder belts. The belt
webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or accidents. This feature
allows the shoulder part of the belt to move
freely with you under normal conditions. However, in an accident the belt will lock and
reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In an accident, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly.
(Continued)
25
WARNING! (Continued)
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat belts are designed to go around
the large bones of your body. These are the
strongest parts of your body and can take
the forces of an accident the best. Wearing
your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in an accident much worse.
You might suffer internal injuries, or you
could even slide out of part of the belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together can
crash into one another in an accident,
hurting one another badly. Never use a
lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than
one person, no matter what their size.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit
back and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of
the front seat, next to your arm in the rear seat.
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide
the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Pulling Out the Lap/Shoulder Belt Latch Plate
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
26
WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion
could ride too high on your body, possibly
causing internal injuries. Always buckle
your belt into the buckle nearest you.
• A belt that is loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop you could move
too far forward, increasing the possibility of
injury. Wear your seat belt snug.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• A belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in an accident,
increasing head and neck injury. A belt
worn under the arm can cause internal
injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so
that the strongest bones will take the force
in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
protect you from injury during an accident.
You are more likely to hit your head in a
collision if you do not wear your shoulder
belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to
be used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs,
below your abdomen. To remove slack in the
lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To
loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in an
accident.
NOTE:
The Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on
until the driver’s seat belt is buckled.
WARNING! (Continued)
• A twisted belt cannot do its job as well. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure
the belt is straight. If you cannot straighten
a belt in your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so
that it is comfortable and not resting on your
neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in
the belt.
Removing Slack from Belt
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the
risk of internal injury in an accident. The
belt forces won’t be at the strong hip and
pelvic bones, but across your abdomen.
Always wear the lap belt as low as possible
and keep it snug.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on
the buckle. The belt will automatically retract to
its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch
plate down the webbing to allow the belt to
retract fully.
(Continued)
27
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in an
accident and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking
for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts
must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if
they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.).
Rear Center Lap/Shoulder Belt
Retractor Lockout (Four-Door
Models Only)
This feature is designed to lock the retractor
whenever the 60% rear seatback is not fully
latched. This prevents someone from wearing
the rear center lap/shoulder belt when the rear
seatback is not fully latched.
NOTE:
• If the rear center lap/shoulder belt cannot
be pulled out, check that the rear seatback is fully latched.
28
• If the rear seatback is properly latched
and the rear center lap/shoulder belt still
cannot be pulled out, the AutomaticLocking Retractor (ALR) system may be
activated. To reset this feature you must
let all of the belt webbing return into the
retractor. You will not be able to pull out
more webbing until all of the webbing has
been returned back into the retractor.
WARNING!
The rear center lap/shoulder belt is equipped
with a lock-out feature to ensure that the rear
seatback is in the fully upright and locked
position when occupied. If the rear seatback is
not fully upright and locked and the rear
center lap/shoulder belt can be pulled out of
the retractor, the vehicle should immediately
be taken to your authorized dealer for service.
Failure to follow this warning could result in
serious or fatal injury.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting
Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a
twisted lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible
to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the
latch plate, grasp and twist the belt webbing
180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter the
slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
clears the folded webbing.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage
In the front seat positions, the shoulder belt
anchorage can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck.
Push in on the anchorage near your outside
shoulder and slide it up or down to reach the
position that serves you best.
When you release the anchorage, try to move it
up or down to make sure that it is locked in
position.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
WARNING!
Position the shoulder belt height adjusters so
that the belt rests across the middle of your
shoulder. Failure to adjust the safety belt
properly could reduce the effectiveness of the
seat belt and increase the risk of injury in an
accident.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you
will prefer a lower position, and if you are taller
than average, you will prefer a higher position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped with an Easy Up feature.
This feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position without pressing the release button. To
verify the shoulder belt anchorage is
latched, pull downward on the shoulder belt
anchorage until it is locked into position
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating
Positions
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking
Retractors which are used to secure a child
restraint system. For additional information refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraint”
section. The chart below defines the type of
feature for each seating position.
First Row
Second
Row
Third Row
Driver
Center
N/A
ALR
N/A
ALR
Passenger
ALR
ALR
N/A
N/A
N/A
• N/A — Not Applicable
• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
If the passenger seating position is equipped
with an ALR and is being used for normal
usage:
Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the occupants midsection so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR
is activated you will hear a ratcheting sound as
the belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract
completely in this case and then carefully pull
out only the amount of webbing necessary to
comfortably wrap around the occupants midsection. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
29
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
Mode — If Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically
pre-locked. The belt will still retract to remove
any slack in the shoulder belt. The Automatic
Locking Mode is available on all passengerseating positions with a combination lap/
shoulder belt.
When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a
child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with this feature. Children
12 years old and under should always be
properly restrained in the rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking
Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates
the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking
Mode.
30
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking
Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt
and allow it to retract completely to disengage
the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
WARNING!
• The belt and retractor assembly must be
replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or
any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the
procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor
assembly could increase the risk of injury in
collisions.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions
are equipped with pretensioning devices that
are designed to remove slack from the seat belt
in the event of an accident. These devices
improve the performance of the seat belt by
assuring that the belt is tight about the occu-
pant early in an accident. Pretensioners work
for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for
proper seat belt placement by the occupant.
The seat belt still must be worn snugly and
positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the airbags, the pretensioners are single use items. A
deployed pretensioner or a deployed airbag
must be replaced immediately.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder
System (BeltAlert姞)
BeltAlert姞 is a feature intended to remind the
driver to fasten their seatbelt. This feature is
active whenever the ignition is on. If the driver is
unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn
on and remain on until the driver seatbelt is
fastened. BeltAlert姞 triggers within 60 seconds
of vehicle speed over 5 mph (8 km/h). The
reminder sequence lasts for 96 seconds or until
the driver seatbelt is fastened. After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light remains illuminated until the driver seatbelt is fastened. The driver should instruct all
other occupants to fasten their seatbelts. If the
driver seatbelt is unbuckled while traveling at
speeds greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), BeltAlert姞
will chime as a single notification and illuminate
the Seat Belt Reminder Light, then will proceed
to the 96 second reminder sequence.
NOTE:
• BeltAlert姞 can be enabled or disabled by
your authorized dealer.
• Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend
deactivating BeltAlert姞.
If BeltAlert姞 is deactivated, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
while the driver’s seat belt remains unfastened.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use seat
belts throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the
mother safe is the best way to keep the baby
safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of
the belt across the thighs and as snug across
the hips as possible. Keep the belt low so that
it does not come across the abdomen. That
way the strong bones of the hips will take the
force if there is an accident.
Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) — Airbags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Airbags for
both the driver and right front passenger as a
supplement to the seat belt restraint systems.
The driver’s Advanced Front Airbag is mounted
in the steering wheel. The passenger Advanced Front Airbag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
letters SRS are embossed on the airbag covers.
Advanced Front Airbag And Knee Bolster
Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Airbags
2 — Knee Bolster
NOTE:
These airbags are certified to new regulations for Advanced Airbags.
The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage
inflator design. This allows the airbag to have
different rates of inflation that are based on the
severity and type of collision.
31
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver
and/or front passenger seat belt buckle switch
that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The seat belt buckle
switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Airbags.
This vehicle may be equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags (SAB) to
provide enhanced protection for an occupant
during a side impact. The Supplemental SeatMounted Side Airbags are located in the outboard side of the front seats.
NOTE:
• Airbag covers may not be obvious in the
interior trim; but they will open during
airbag deployment.
• After any accident, the vehicle should be
taken to an authorized dealer immediately.
Airbag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following airbag system components:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Airbag Warning Light
32
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolster
• Driver Advanced Front Airbag
• Passenger Advanced Front Airbag
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags
(SAB)
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners and Seat Belt
Buckle Switch
Advanced Front Airbag Features
The Advanced Front Airbag system has multistage driver and front passenger airbags. This
system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by
the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact
sensors.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately
during an impact that requires airbag deployment. This low output is used in less severe
collisions. A higher energy output is used for
more severe collisions.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near
the airbag on the instrument panel, because any such objects could cause harm if
the vehicle is in a collision severe enough
to cause the airbag to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the airbag
covers or attempt to open them manually.
You may damage the airbags and you
could be injured because the airbags may
no longer be functional. The protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to
open only when the airbags are inflating.
• If your vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags (SAB), do
not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the SAB; the
performance could be adversely affected
and/or objects could be pushed into you,
causing serious injury.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• If your vehicle is equipped with SAB, do not
attach cupholders or any other objects on
or around the door. The inflating SAB could
drive the objects into occupants, causing
serious injury.
• Do not cover or place items on the airbag
covers. These items may cause serious
injury during inflation.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee
bolster in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee
bolster such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags
(SAB) — If Equipped
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags provide enhanced protection to help protect an
occupant during a side impact. The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbag is marked
with an airbag label sewn into the outboard
side of the front seats.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the
knees of the driver and the front passenger,
and position front occupants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Airbags.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbag
Location
When the airbag deploys, it opens the seam
between the front and side of the seat’s trim
cover. Each airbag deploys independently, that
is a left side impact deploys the left airbag only
and a right-side impact deploys only the right
airbag.
WARNING!
Being too close to the Supplemental SeatMounted Side Airbag during deployment
could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front Airbags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the
driver and front passenger. Side airbags also
work with seat belts to improve occupant protection.
Here are some simple steps you can take to
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying
airbag:
1. Children 12 years and under should always
ride buckled up in a rear seat.
WARNING!
Infants in rear facing child restraints should
never ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a
passenger airbag. An airbag deployment
could cause severe injury or death to infants
in that position.
33
Children that are not big enough to properly
wear the vehicle seat belt should be secured in
the rear seat, in a child restraint or beltpositioning booster seat. Older children who do
not use child restraints or belt-positioning
booster seats should ride properly buckled up
in the rear seat. Never allow children to slide
the shoulder belt behind them or under their
arm.
You should read the instructions provided with
your child restraint to make sure that you are
using it properly.
2. All occupants should always use their lap
and shoulder belts properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should
be moved back as far as practical to allow the
Advanced Front Airbags room to inflate.
4. Do not lean against the door or window. If
your vehicle has side airbags, and deployment
occurs, the side airbags will inflate forcefully
into the space between you and the door.
5. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to
be modified to accommodate a disabled per-
34
son, contact the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided under “If You Need Assistance”.
WARNING!
• Relying on the airbags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The
airbags work with your seat belt to restrain
you properly. In some collisions, the airbags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your
seat belts even though you have airbags.
• Being too close to the steering wheel or
instrument panel during airbag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death.
Airbags need room to inflate. Sit back,
comfortably extending your arms to reach
the steering wheel or instrument panel.
• If the vehicle has Supplemental SeatMounted Side Airbags (SAB), they also
need room to inflate. Do not lean against
the door or window. Sit upright in the center
of the seat.
NOTE:
After any accident, the vehicle should be
taken to an authorized dealer immediately.
Airbag Deployment Sensors And
Controls
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The ORC is part of a regulated safety system
required for this vehicle.
The ORC determines if deployment of the front
and/or side airbags is required in a frontal or
side collision. Based on the impact sensors
signals, a central electronic ORC deploys the
Advanced Front Airbags, Supplemental SeatMounted Side Airbags (SAB) — if equipped,
and front seat belt pretensioners, as required,
depending on each type of impact.
Advanced Front Airbags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing
the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and type of collision.
Advanced Front Airbags are not expected to
reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover
collisions.
The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in
all frontal collisions, including some that may
produce substantial vehicle damage — for
example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other
hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but
that produce a severe initial deceleration.
The side airbags will not deploy in all side
collisions. Side airbag deployment will depend
on the severity and type of collision.
Because airbag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of
whether or not an airbag should have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in
all crashes, and also are needed to help keep
you in position, away from an inflating airbag.
The ORC also monitors the readiness of the
electronic parts of the airbag system whenever
the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN
positions. If the key is in the LOCK position, in
the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the
airbag system is not on and the airbags will not
inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply
system that may deploy the airbags even if the
battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Also, the ORC turns on the Airbag
Warning Light for four to eight seconds for a self-check when the
ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Airbag Warning
Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will
sound if the light comes on again after initial
startup.
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
the instrument cluster Airbag Warning Light if a
malfunction is noted that could affect the airbag
system. The diagnostics also record the nature
of the malfunction.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t have
the airbags to protect you in a collision. If the
light does not come on as a bulb check when
the ignition is first turned on, stays on after
you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you
drive, have an authorized dealer service the
airbag system immediately.
Driver And Passenger Advanced Front
Airbag Inflator Units
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front
Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of
the steering wheel and the right side of the
instrument panel. When the ORC detects a
collision requiring the Advanced Front Airbags,
it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Airbags. Different airbag inflation
rates are possible, based on the collision type
and severity. The steering wheel hub trim cover
and the upper right side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the airbags
inflate to their full size. The airbags fully inflate
35
in about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is about half
of the time it takes to blink your eyes. The
airbags then quickly deflate while helping to
restrain the driver and front passenger.
The Advanced Front Airbag gas is vented
through the vent holes in the sides of the
airbag. In this way, the airbags do not interfere
with your control of the vehicle.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags
(SAB) Inflator Units — If Equipped
The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Airbags
Inflator Units (if equipped) are designed to
activate only in certain side collisions.
The ORC determines if a side collision requires
the side airbags to inflate based on the severity
and type of collision.
Based on the severity and type of collision, the
side airbag inflator on the crash side of the
vehicle is triggered, releasing a quantity of
non-toxic gas. The inflating side airbag exits
through the seat seam into the space between
the occupant and the door. The side airbags
fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds. The side
airbag moves at a very high speed and with
such a high force, that it could injure you if you
36
are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the side airbag inflates. This especially applies to children.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as
long as the battery has power or until the
ignition key is removed.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the
knees of the driver and the front passenger,
and position front occupants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Airbag.
• Unlock the doors automatically.
Front And Side Impact Sensors
In front and side impacts, front and side impact
sensors can aid the ORC in determining the
appropriate response to certain impact events.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment, if the communication network remains intact, and the power remains intact,
depending on the nature of the event the ORC
will determine whether to have the Enhanced
Accident Response System perform the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery
has power or until the ignition key is turned
off.
If A Deployment Occurs
The front airbags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side airbags will not deploy in
all collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the
airbags, any or all of the following may occur:
• The nylon airbag material may sometimes
cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to
the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are
similar to friction rope burns or those you
might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact
with chemicals. They are not permanent and
normally heal quickly. However, if you
haven’t healed significantly within a few
days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
• As the airbags deflate you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used for airbag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or
eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water.
For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air.
If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If
these particles settle on your clothing, follow
the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
cleaning.
• Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags
have deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the airbags will not be in place to
protect you.
WARNING!
• Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision.
Have the airbags, seat belt pretensioner,
and seat belt retractor assembly replaced
by an authorized dealer as soon as immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) system serviced as well.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your
airbag system. The airbag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if
modifications are made. Take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer for any airbag system service. If your seat, including your trim
cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in
any way (including removal or loosening/
tightening of seat attachment bolts), take
the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only
manufacturer approved seat accessories
may be used. If it is necessary to modify the
airbag system for persons with disabilities,
contact your authorized dealer.
Maintaining Your Airbag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the airbag
system could cause it to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the airbag system
is not there to protect you. Do not modify
the components or wiring, including adding
any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right
side of the instrument panel. Do not modify
the front bumper or vehicle body structure,
or add aftermarket side steps or running
boards.
• You need proper knee impact protection in
a collision. Do not mount or locate any
aftermarket equipment on or behind the
knee bolsters.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of
the airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell
anyone who works on your vehicle that it
has an airbag system.
37
Airbag Warning Light
You will want to have the airbags
ready to inflate for your protection
in a collision. The Airbag Warning
Light monitors the internal circuits
and interconnecting wiring associated with airbag system electrical
components. While the airbag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer
service the airbag system immediately.
• The Airbag Warning Light does not come on
during the four to eight seconds when the
ignition switch is first turned to the ON/RUN
position.
• The Airbag Warning Light remains on after
the four to eight-second interval.
• The Airbag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or
38
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes
and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no
data are recorded by the EDR under normal
driving conditions and no personal data
(e.g. name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such
as law enforcement, could combine the EDR
data with the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled
up at all times, including babies and children.
Children 12 years and under should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available.
According to crash statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seats,
rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints
for children from newborn size to the child
almost large enough for an adult safety belt.
Always check the child seat owner’s manual to
ensure you have the correct seat for your child.
Use the restraint that is correct for your child.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a
tiny baby, can become a projectile inside the
vehicle. The force required to hold even an
infant on your lap could become so great that
you could not hold the child, no matter how
strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
Infants And Child Restraints
• Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are
at least one year old and weigh at least
20 lbs (9 kg). Two types of child restraints
can be used rearward-facing: infant carriers
and “convertible” child seats.
• The infant carrier is only used rearwardfacing in the vehicle. It is recommended for
children who weigh up to about 20 lbs (9 kg).
“Convertible” child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction
than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rearward-facing by children who weigh more
than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are less than one year
old. Both types of child restraints are held in
the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the
ISOFIX child restraint anchorage system
(Refer to ISOFIX — Child Seat Anchorage
System.)
WARNING!
• Rearward-facing child seats must never be
used in the front seat of a vehicle with the
front passenger airbag unless the airbag is
turned off. An airbag deployment could
cause severe injury or death to infants in
this position.
• Improper installation can lead to failure of
an infant or child restraint. It could come
loose in a collision. The child could be
badly injured or killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an
infant or child restraint.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• A rearward-facing infant restraint should
only be used in a rear seat. A rearwardfacing infant restraint in the front seat may
be struck by a deploying passenger airbag
which may cause severe or fatal injury to
the infant.
Here are some tips for getting the most out of
your child restraint:
• Before buying any restraint system, make
sure that it has a label certifying that it meets
all applicable Safety Standards. The manufacturer also recommends that you try a
child restraint in the vehicle seats where you
will use it before you buy it.
• The restraint must be appropriate for your
child’s weight and height. Check the label on
the restraint for weight and height limits.
• Carefully follow the instructions that come
with the restraint. If you install the restraint
improperly, it may not work when you need it.
39
• All seating positions (except for driver) have
a automatic locking retractor. The seat belts
are designed to keep the lap portion tight
around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. For the seat
belt with the automatic locking retractor, pull
the belt from the retractor until there is
enough to allow you to pass through the
child restraint and slide the latch plate into
the buckle. Then, pull the belt until it is fully
extracted from the retractor. Allow the belt to
return to the retractor, pulling on the excess
webbing to tighten the lap portion around the
child restraint. For additional information, refer to ⬙Automatic Locking Mode⬙.
• In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is
too close to the belt path opening on the
restraint. Disconnect the latch plate from the
buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt
several times to shorten it. Insert the latch
plate into the buckle with the release button
facing out.
• If the belt still cannot be tightened, or if
pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens
40
the belt, disconnect the latch plate from the
buckle, turn the buckle around, and insert
the latch plate into the buckle again. If you
still cannot make the child restraint secure,
try a different seating position.
• Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as
the manufacturer’s instructions tell you.
WARNING!
When your child restraint is not in use, secure
it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it
from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the
vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could
strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
Older Children and Child Restraints
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg)
and who are older than one year can ride
forward-facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing
child seats and convertible child seats used in
the forward-facing direction are for children
who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg), and who
are older than one year. These child seats are
also held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt
or the ISOFIX child restraint anchorage system
(Refer to ISOFIX — Child Seat Anchorage
System).
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children
weighing more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are
still too small to fit the vehicle’s seat belts
properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent
over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s
back is against the seatback, they should use a
belt-positioning booster seat. The child and
belt-positioning booster seat are held in the
vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt.
Children Too Large for Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are
long enough to bend over the front of the seat
when their back is against the seatback, should
use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
• The lap portion should be low on the hips
and as snug as possible.
• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position.
• If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the
vehicle. Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind the back.
Automatic-Locking Retractor (ALR)
To operate the switchable retractor, pull the belt
from the retractor until there is enough to allow
you to pass through the child restraint and slide
the latch plate into the buckle. Then pull on the
belt until it is all removed from the retractor.
Allow the belt to return into the retractor, pulling
on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint. Follow the instructions of the child restraint manufacture.
NOTE:
To reset this feature you must let all of the
belt webbing return into the retractor. You
will not be able to pull out more webbing
until all of the webbing has been returned
back into the retractor.
Installing the Child Restraint System
We urge you to carefully follow the directions of
the manufacturer when installing your child
restraint. Many, but not all, restraint systems will
be equipped with separate straps on each
side, with each having a hook or connector for
attachment to the lower anchorage, and a
means for adjusting the tension of the strap.
Forward-facing toddler restraints and some
rearward-facing infant restraints will also be
equipped with a tether strap having a hook for
attachment to the tether strap anchorage, and
a means for adjusting the tension of the strap.
In general, you will first loosen the adjusters on
the lower and tether straps so that you can
more easily attach the hook or connector to the
lower and tether anchorages. The tether strap
should be routed under the center of the head
restraint and attached to the tether anchor on
the rear of the seatback. Then tighten all three
straps as you push the child restraint rearward
and downward into the seat.
Not all child restraint systems will be installed
as we have described here. Again, carefully
follow the instructions that come with the child
restraint system.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
lead to increased head motion and possible
injury to the child. Use only the anchor position directly behind the child seat to secure a
child restraint top tether strap.
Universal Child Seat — Two-Door Models
Mass Group
0 - Up to 10 kg
0+ - Up to 13 kg
I - 9 to 18 kg
II - 15 to 25 kg
III - 22 to 36 kg
Seating Position
Front
Rear
PassenOutboard
ger
X
U
X
U
X
U
X
U
X
U
NOTE:
If your child restraint seat is not ISOFIXcompatible, install the restraint using the
vehicle seat belts.
41
Universal Child Seat — Four-Door Models
Seating Position
Front
Rear
Mass Group
Rear
PassenOutCenter
ger
board
0 - Up to 10 kg
X
U
U
0+ - Up to
X
U
U
13 kg
I - 9 to 18 kg
X
U
U
II - 15 to 25 kg
X
U
U
III - 22 to 36 kg
X
U
U
Key of letters used in the table above:
U = Suitable for “universal” category restraints
approved for use in this mass group.
UF = Suitable for forward-facing “universal”
category restraints approved for use in this
mass group.
L = Suitable for particular child restraints given
on attached list. These restraints may be of the
“specific vehicle”, “restricted” or “semiuniversal” categories.
B = Built-in restraint approved for this mass
group.
42
X = Seat position not suitable for children in this
mass group.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
lead to increased head motion and possible
injury to the child. Use only the anchor position directly behind the child seat to secure a
child restraint top tether strap.
ISOFIX — Child Seat Anchorage System
Your vehicle’s rear seat is equipped with the
child restraint anchorage system called ISOFIX. The ISOFIX system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the
vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing the child
restraint using lower anchorages and upper
tether straps from the child restraint to the
vehicle structure.
ISOFIX-compatible child restraint systems are
now available. However, because the lower
anchorages are to be introduced over a period
of years, child restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to
also have features for installation using the
vehicle’s seat belts. Child restraints having
tether straps and hooks for connection to the
top tether anchorages, have been available for
some time. For some older child restraints,
many child restraint manufacturers offer
add-on tether strap kits or retro-fit kits. You are
urged to take advantage of all the available
attachments provided with your child restraint
in any vehicle.
NOTE:
When using the ISOFIX attaching system to
install a child restraint, please ensure that
all seat belts not being used for occupant
restraints are stowed and out of reach of
children. It is recommended that before installing the child restraint, buckle the seat
belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the
child restraint and out of reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of tucking the
seat belt behind the child restraint, route the
seat belt through the child restraint belt path
and then buckle it. This should stow the seat
belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child.
Remind all children in the vehicle that the
seat belts are not toys and should not be
played with, and never leave an unattended
child in the vehicle.
The rear seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating
ISOFIX-compatible child seats having flexible,
webbing-mounted lower attachments. Child
seats with fixed lower attachments must be
installed in the outboard positions only. Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment,
never install ISOFIX-compatible child seats
such that two seats share a common lower
anchorage.
If you are installing ISOFIX-compatible child
restraints in adjacent rear seating positions,
you can use the ISOFIX anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt for the outboard position, but you
must use the vehicle’s seat belt at the center
position. If your child restraints are not ISOFIXcompatible, you can only install the child restraints using the vehicle’s seat belts. Please
refer to “Installing The ISOFIX-Compatible
Child Restraint System” for typical installation
instructions.
ISOFIX Child Seat – Two-Door Models
Size
Seating Position
Fixture
Class
Mass
Front
Rear
Group
PasOutsenger board
E
ISO/R1
X
X
0 - Up to
10 kg
(1)
X
X
E
ISO/R1
X
X
D
ISO/R2
X
X
0+ - Up
to 13 kg
C
ISO/R3
X
X
(1)
X
X
D
ISO/R2
X
X
C
ISO/R3
X
X
B
ISO/F2
X
IUF
I - 9 to
B1
ISO/
X
IUF
18 kg
F2X
A
ISO/F3
X
IUF
(1)
X
X
II - 15 to
(1)
X
X
25 kg
III - 22 to
(1)
X
X
36 kg
(1) — For the child restraint systems (CRS)
which do not carry the ISO/XX size class identification (A to G), for the applicable mass
group, the manufacturer will indicate the vehicle specific ISOFIX child restraint system(s)
recommended for each position.
Key of letters used in the table above:
IUF = Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraint
systems of “universal” category approved for
use in the mass group.
IL = Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint
systems (CRS) given in the attached list. These
ISOFIX CRS are those of the “specific vehicle”,
“restricted” or “semi-universal” categories.
X = ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX
child restraint systems in this mass group
and/or this size class.
43
ISOFIX Child Seat – Four-Door Models
Mass
Group
0 - Up
to 10 kg
Size
Class Fixture
E
0+ - Up
to 13 kg
E
D
C
I - 9 to
18 kg
D
C
B
B1
A
II - 15
to 25 kg
III - 22
to 36 kg
ISO/R1
(1)
ISO/R1
ISO/R2
ISO/R3
(1)
ISO/R2
ISO/R3
ISO/F2
ISO/
F2X
ISO/F3
(1)
(1)
(1)
Seating Position
Front
Passenger
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Rear
Outboard
IUF
X
IUF
X
X
X
X
X
IUF
IUF
Rear
Center
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
IUF
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
(1) — For the child restraint systems (CRS)
which do not carry the ISO/XX size class identification (A to G), for the applicable mass
group, the manufacturer will indicate the ve44
hicle specific ISOFIX child restraint system(s)
recommended for each position.
Key of letters used in the table above:
IUF = Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraint
systems of “universal” category approved for
use in the mass group.
IL = Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint
systems (CRS) given in the attached list. These
ISOFIX CRS are those of the “specific vehicle”,
“restricted” or “semi-universal” categories.
The rear seat lower anchorages
are round bars, located at the rear
of the seat cushion where it meets
the seatback, and are visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install
the child restraint. You will easily
feel them if you run your finger along the
intersection of the seatback and seat cushion
surfaces.
X = ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX
child restraint systems in this mass group
and/or this size class.
Installing The ISOFIX-Compatible Child
Restraint System
We urge you to carefully follow the directions of
the manufacturer when installing your child
restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be
installed as described here. Again, carefully
follow the installation instructions that were provided with the child restraint system.
ISOFIX Anchorages (Two-Door Models)
with each having a hook or connector for
attachment to the lower anchorage and a
means for adjusting the tension of the strap.
Forward-facing toddler restraints and some
rear-facing infant restraints will also be
equipped with a tether strap having a hook for
attachment to the tether strap anchorage, and
a means for adjusting the tension of the strap.
ISOFIX Anchorages (Four-Door Models)
Tether Strap Mounting (Two-Door Models)
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position located on
the back of the seat.
Tether Strap Mounting (Four-Door Models)
You will first loosen the child seat adjusters on
the lower straps and on the tether strap so that
you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. Next, attach
the lower hooks or connectors over the top of
the anchorage bars, pushing aside the seat
cover material. Then, locate the tether anchorage directly behind the seat where you are
placing the child restraint and attach the tether
strap to the anchorage, being careful to route
the tether strap to provide the most direct path
between the anchor and the child restraint.
Finally, tighten all three straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the
seat, removing slack in the straps according to
the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Many, but not all restraint systems will be
equipped with separate straps on each side,
45
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
ISOFIX anchorages can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. The child could be
badly injured or killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with an Automatic Locking
Retractor to secure a Child Restraint System
(CRS). These types of seat belts are designed
to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight
around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR will
make a ratcheting noise if you extract the entire
belt from the retractor and then allow the belt to
retract into the retractor. For additional information on ALR, refer to “Automatic Locking Mode”
description under “Seat Belts In Passenger
Seating Positions” section. The chart below
46
defines the seating positions with an Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch
plate.
First Row
Second
Row
Third Row
Driver
Center
CRS
Lock
CRS
Lock
ALR
ALR
Passenger
CRS Lock
2. Finally, pull on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child restraint. Any seat belt system will loosen with
time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it
tight if necessary.
To attach a child restraint tether strap:
ALR
ALR
Installing a Child Restraint with an ALR:
1. To install a child restraint with ALR, first, pull
enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to route it through the belt path of the
child restraint. Slide the latch plate into the
buckle until you hear a “click.” Next, extract all
the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and
then allow the belt to retract into the retractor.
As the belt retracts, you will hear a ratcheting
sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in
the Automatic Locking mode.
Tether Strap Mounting (Two-Door Models)
Vehicles With Rear Web Buckles That May
Need To Be Twisted
Tether Strap Mounting (Four-Door Models)
Route the tether strap over the seatback and
attach the hook to the tether anchor located on
the back of the seat. For the outboard seating
positions, route the tether under the head rest,
and attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
lead to increased head motion and possible
injury to the child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a
child restraint top tether strap.
• In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is
too close to the belt path opening on the
restraint. Disconnect the latch plate from the
buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt
several times to shorten it. Insert the latch
plate into the buckle with the release button
facing out.
• If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if pulling
and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt,
disconnect the latch plate from the buckle,
turn the buckle around, and insert the latch
plate into the buckle again. If you still can’t
make the child restraint secure, try a different
seating position.
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown
about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in an accident.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by
seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN
RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the
engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in
your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are
desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration
within the limits of local traffic laws, contributes
to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and
should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the
factory is a high-quality energy conserving type
lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent
with anticipated climate conditions under
which vehicle operations will occur. For the
recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintain47
ing Your Vehicle”. NON-DETERGENT OR
STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE
USED.
A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be considered a normal part
of the break-in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
Additional Requirements For Diesel
Engine — If Equipped
During the first 1500 km avoid heavy loads, e.g.
driving at full throttle. Do not exceed 2/3 of the
maximum permissible engine speed for each
gear. Change gear in good time. Do not shift
down a gear manually in order to brake.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE
CARGO AREA.
48
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To
avoid breathing (CO) follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to
move your vehicle in or out of the area.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with
the engine running, adjust your heating or
cooling controls to force outside air into the
vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are closed
and the climate control BLOWER switch is set
at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of
the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can
be detected inside the vehicle, or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,
have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas
for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections
could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the
passenger compartment. In addition, inspect
the exhaust system each time the vehicle is
raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as
required.
Safety Checks You Should Make
Inside The Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking
for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts
must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced
after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must
be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.). If there is any question regarding belt or
retractor condition, replace the belt.
Airbag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for four
to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is
not lit during starting, see your authorized
dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
on while driving, have the system checked by
an authorized dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode
and place the blower control on high speed.
You should be able to feel the air directed
against the windshield. See your authorized
dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the foot
well of your vehicle. Use only floor mats that
leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are
firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of
position and interfere with the pedals or impair
safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause
loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of
serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly attached to the floor mat fasteners.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never place or install floor mats or other
floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be
properly secured to prevent them from
moving and interfering with the pedals or
the ability to control the vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats.
Additional floor mats and other coverings
will reduce the size of the pedal area and
interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis.
Always properly reinstall and secure floor
mats that have been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall
into the driver foot well while the vehicle is
moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal
causing a loss of vehicle control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory.
(Continued)
49
WARNING! (Continued)
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation
or mounting can cause interference with the
brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation
causing loss of control of the vehicle.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should
Make OutsideThe Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and
uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails,
glass, or other objects lodged in the tread.
Inspect the tread and sidewall for cuts and
cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness.
Check the tires (including spare) for proper
pressure.
50
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls. Check
turn signal and high beam indicator lights on
the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, engine coolant, oil, or other fluid
leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if
fuel, power steering fluid, or brake fluid leaks
are suspected, the cause should be located
and corrected immediately.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF
YOUR VEHICLE
• MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Power Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Uconnect™ Phone — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .
• Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Uconnect™ Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . .
• Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect™
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .
• Voice Command System Operation . . . . . . . .
• Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
56
56
56
56
57
57
58
63
64
67
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
68
74
74
74
51
• Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Front Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped . .
• Front Seatback Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Easy Entry Seats — Two Door Models . . . . . . .
• Tip n’ Slide Seats — Two Door Models . . . . . . .
• Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Fold and Tumble Rear Seat — Two Door Models .
• Removing the Rear Seat — Two Door Models . . .
• Replacing the Rear Seat — Two Door Models . . .
• 60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat — Four Door Models
• TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . . . . .
• LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Headlights and Position Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . . .
• Headlights with Wipers (Available with Automatic
Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
76
76
77
77
78
78
78
79
79
80
81
81
82
83
83
83
83
84
. . . . . 84
. . . . . 84
. . . . . 85
• Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Headlight Dimmer Switch . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Front Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . .
• Rear Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .
• Instrument Panel Dimmer . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Headlight Leveling System — If Equipped . .
• WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .
• Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . .
• Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• TILT STEERING COLUMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
• To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• To Set a Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• To Vary the Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . .
• To Accelerate for Passing . . . . . . . . . . . .
• ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLET . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
85
85
85
85
85
85
86
87
87
88
88
88
89
89
90
90
90
90
90
90
91
91
53
• CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Front Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Rear Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Console Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Rear Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• DUAL TOP — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Removing the Soft Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Installing the Soft Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• FREEDOM TOP™ THREE-PIECE MODULAR HARD TOP — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Front Panel(s) Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Freedom Top™ Storage Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Front Panel(s) Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Front Panel(s) Installation with Rear Hard Top Removed .
• Rear Hard Top Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Rear Hard Top Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• DOOR FRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Door Frame Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Door Frame Installation — Two-Door Models . . . . . . . .
• Door Frame Installation — Four-Door Models . . . . . . .
54
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
93
93
93
93
93
94
94
94
95
. 97
. 97
. 98
100
100
100
102
102
102
103
104
• SOFT TOP — TWO DOOR MODELS . . . . . . . . . . .
• Quick Steps to Lowering the Soft Top . . . . . . . .
• Quick Steps to Raising the Soft Top . . . . . . . . .
• Lowering The Soft Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Raising the Soft Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• SOFT TOP (FOUR-DOOR MODELS) . . . . . . . . . . .
• Quick Steps for Lowering the Soft Top . . . . . . .
• Quick Steps for Raising the Soft Top . . . . . . . .
• Folding Down The Soft Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Putting Up The Soft Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• SUNRIDER姞 (TWO-DOOR MODELS) — IF EQUIPPED .
• Opening the Sunrider姞 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Closing the Sunrider姞 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• SUNRIDER姞 (FOUR-DOOR MODELS) — IF EQUIPPED
• Opening the Sunrider姞 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Closing the Sunrider姞 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• FOLDING WINDSHIELD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Lowering the Windshield and Removing Side Bars
• Raising the Windshield and Replacing Side Bars .
• REAR WINDOW FEATURES — HARD TOP ONLY . . .
• Rear Window Wiper/Washer — If Equipped . . . . .
• Rear Window Defroster — If Equipped . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
105
106
107
109
114
119
120
121
123
129
133
134
135
135
135
136
136
137
139
140
140
140
55
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal
and vertical adjustment of the mirror. The mirror
should be adjusted to center on the view
through the rear window.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside
mirror(s) to center on the adjacent lane of traffic
with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the
inside mirror.
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the
small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The
mirror should be adjusted while set in the day
position (toward the windshield).
Power Mirrors — If Equipped
Outside Rearview Mirror
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
56
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller
and farther away than they really are. Relying
too much on your passenger side mirror could
cause you to collide with another vehicle or
other object. Use your inside mirror when
judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen
in the passenger side mirror.
The power mirror switch is located on the
center of the instrument panel, below the climate controls. A rotary knob selects the left
mirror, right mirror or off position.
dio system; the system will automatically mute
your radio when using the Uconnect™ Phone.
* The Uconnect™ Phone requires a mobile
phone equipped with the Bluetooth姞
ⴖHands-Free Profile,ⴖ version 1.0 or higher.
See Uconnect™ website for supported
phones.
Power Mirror Switch
After selecting a mirror, move the knob in the
same direction you want the mirror to move.
Use the center off position to guard against
accidentally moving a mirror position.
Vanity Mirrors
Vanity mirrors are located on the sun visors. To
use the mirrors, rotate the sun visor down and
swing the mirror cover upward.
Vanity Mirror
Uconnect™ Phone — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
For Uconnect™ Phone with Navigation radio, refer to the Navigation radio Manual’s
(separate booklet) Uconnect™ Phone section.
Uconnect™ Phone is a voice-activated, handsfree, in-vehicle communications system.
Uconnect™ Phone allows you to dial a phone
number with your mobile phone* using simple
voice commands (e.g., “Call”ѧ“Jim”ѧ “Work” or
“Dial”ѧ“151-1234 -5555⬙). Your mobile phone’s
audio is transmitted through your vehicle’s au-
NOTE:
For Uconnect™ Phone customer support,
visit the following websites:
• www.chrysler.com/Uconnect
• www.dodge.com/Uconnect
• www.jeep.com/Uconnect
Uconnect™ Phone allows you to transfer calls
between the Uconnect™ Phone and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and
enables you to mute the Uconnect™ Phone’s
microphone for private conversation.
The Uconnect™ Phone is driven through your
Bluetooth姞 “Hands-Free profile” mobile phone.
Uconnect™ Phone features Bluetooth姞 technology - the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each
other without wires or a docking station, so
57
Uconnect™ Phone works no matter where you
stow your mobile phone (be it your purse,
pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is
turned on and has been paired to the vehicle’s
Uconnect™ Phone. The Uconnect™ Phone allows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to
the system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile
phone can be used with the Uconnect™ Phone
at a time. The Uconnect™ Phone is available in
English, Dutch, French, German, Italian or
Spanish languages (as equipped).
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be
used only in safe driving conditions following
local laws and phone use. All attention should
be kept on the roadway ahead. Failure to do
so may result in a collision causing serious
injury or death.
Uconnect™ Phone Button
The radio or steering wheel controls (if equipped) will contain the
two control buttons (Uconnect™
Phone
button and Voice
Command
button) that will
58
enable you to access the system. When you
press the button you will hear the word
Uconnect™ followed by a BEEP. The beep is
your signal to give a command.
NOTE:
The driver side upper windshield trim contains the microphone for the Uconnect™
Phone.
Voice Command Button
Actual button location may vary
with radio. The individual buttons
are described in the “Operation”
section.
The Uconnect™ Phone can be used with
Hands-Free Profile certified Bluetooth姞 mobile
phones. Some phones may not support all the
Uconnect™ Phone features. Refer to your mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer
for details.
The Uconnect™ Phone is fully integrated with
the vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the
Uconnect™ Phone can be adjusted either from
the radio volume control knob or from the
steering wheel radio control, if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual
prompts from the Uconnect™ Phone such as
⬙CELL⬙ or caller ID on certain radios.
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the
Uconnect™ Phone and to navigate through the
Uconnect™ Phone menu structure. Voice commands are required after most Uconnect™
Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through
the available options.
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must
wait for the beep, which follows the “Ready”
prompt or another prompt.
• For certain operations, compound commands can be used. For example, instead of
saying “Setup” and then “Phone Pairing”, the
following compound command can be said:
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
• For each feature explanation in this section,
only the compound form of the voice command is given. You can also break the com-
mands into parts and say each part of the
command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the compound form
voice command “Phonebook New Entry”, or
you can break the compound form command into two voice commands: “Phonebook” and “New Entry.” Please remember,
the Uconnect™ Phone works best when you
talk in a normal conversational tone, as if
speaking to someone sitting a few feet/
meters away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree.”
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you
want to know your options at any prompt, say
“Help” following the beep. The Uconnect™
Phone will play all the options at any prompt if
you ask for help.
To activate the Uconnect™ Phone from idle,
button and follow the
simply press the
audible prompts for directions. All Uconnect™
Phone sessions begin with a press of the
button on the radio control head.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say
“Cancel” and you will be returned to the main
menu. However, in a few instances the system
will take you back to the previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect™ Phone to a Mobile
Phone
To begin using your Uconnect™ Phone, you
must pair your compatible Bluetooth姞 enabled
mobile phone (refer to “Introduction” section to
learn about the phone type).
To complete the pairing process, you will need
to reference your mobile phone owner’s
manual. The Uconnect™ website may also
provide detailed instructions for pairing.
The following are general phone to Uconnect™
Phone pairing instructions:
• Press the
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following
beep, say “Setup Phone Pairing”.
• When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a
Phone” and follow the audible prompts.
• You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal
Identification Number (PIN), which you will
later need to enter into your mobile phone.
You can enter any four-digit PIN. You will not
need to remember this PIN after the initial
pairing process.
• For identification purposes, you will be
prompted to give the Uconnect™ Phone a
name for your mobile phone. Each mobile
phone that is paired should be given a
unique phone name.
• You will then be asked to give your mobile
phone a priority level between 1 and 7, with
1 being the highest priority. You can pair up
to seven mobile phones to your Uconnect™
Phone. However, at any given time, only one
mobile phone can be in use, connected to
your Uconnect™ System. The priority allows
the Uconnect™ Phone to know which mobile
phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in
the vehicle at the same time. For example, if
priority 3 and priority 5 phones are present in
the vehicle, the Uconnect™ Phone will use
the priority 3 mobile phone when you make a
call. You can select to use a lower priority
59
mobile phone at any time (refer to “Advanced Phone Connectivity”).
Dial by Saying a Number
• Press the
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following
beep, say “Dial”.
• The system will prompt you to say the number you want to call.
• For example, you can say “151-1234-5555”.
• The Uconnect™ Phone will confirm the
phone number and then dial. The number
will appear in the display of certain radios.
Call by Saying a Name
• Press the
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following
beep, say “Call”.
• The system will prompt you to say the name
of the person you want to call.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following
beep, say the name of the person you want
to call. For example, you can say “John
60
Doe”, where John Doe is a previously stored
name entry in the Uconnect™ phonebook or
downloaded phonebook. To learn how to
store a name in the phonebook , refer to
“Add Names to Your Uconnect™ Phonebook”.
• The Uconnect™ Phone will confirm the name
and then dial the corresponding phone number, which may appear in the display of
certain radios.
Add Names to Your Uconnect™
Phonebook
• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g., “Home”, “Work”, “Mobile”, or
“Other”). This will allow you to store multiple
numbers for each phonebook entry, if desired.
• When prompted, recite the phone number
for the phonebook entry that you are adding.
After you are finished adding an entry into the
phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to
add more phone numbers to the current entry
or to return to the main menu.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following
beep, say “Phonebook New Entry”.
The Uconnect™ Phone will allow you to enter
up to 32 names in the phonebook with each
name having up to four associated phone
numbers and designations. Each language has
a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
only in that language. In addition, if equipped
and supported by your phone, Uconnect™
Phone automatically downloads mobile
phone’s phonebook.
• When prompted, say the name of the new
entry. Use of long names helps the Voice
Command and it is recommended. For example, say “Robert Smith” or “Robert” instead of “Bob”.
Phonebook Download – Automatic
Phonebook transfer from Mobile Phone
If equipped and specifically supported by your
phone, Uconnect™ Phone automatically downloads names (text names) and number entries
NOTE:
Adding names to the Uconnect™ Phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is
not in motion.
• Press the
button to begin.
from the mobile phone’s phonebook. Specific
Bluetooth姞 Phones with Phone Book Access
Profile may support this feature. See
Uconnect™ website for supported phones.
• To call a name from downloaded (or
Uconnect™) Phonebook, follow the procedure in “Call by Saying a Name” section.
• Automatic download and update, if supported, begins as soon as the phone
Bluetooth姞 wireless connection is made to
the Uconnect™ Phone. For example, after
you start the vehicle.
• Maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be
downloaded and updated every time a
phone is connected to the Uconnect™
Phone.
• Depending on the maximum number of entries downloaded, there may be a short
delay before the latest downloaded names
can be used. Until then, if available, the
previously downloaded phonebook is available for use.
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile phone is accessible.
• Only the mobile phone’s phonebook is
downloaded. SIM card phonebook is not
part of the mobile phonebook.
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the Uconnect™ Phone.
These can only be edited on the mobile
phone. The changes are transferred and
updated to Uconnect™ Phone on the next
phone connection.
Phonebook Download — Single Entry
If equipped and supported by your phone,
Uconnect™ Phone allows the user to download
entries from their phone via Bluetooth姞. To use
button and say
this feature, press the
“Phonebook Download.” The system prompts
“Ready to accept “V” card entry via
Bluetooth姞…” The system is now ready to accept phonebook entries from your phone using
the Bluetooth姞 Object Exchange Profile
(OBEX). Please see your phone Owners’
Manual for specific instructions on how to send
these entries from your phone.
NOTE:
• Phone handset must support Bluetooth姞
OBEX transfers of phonebook entries to
use this feature.
• Some phones cannot send phonebook
entries if they are already connected to
any system via Bluetooth姞, and you may
see a message on the phone display that
the Bluetooth姞 link is busy. In this case,
the user must first disconnect or drop the
Bluetooth姞 connection to the Uconnect™
Phone, and then send the address book
entry via Bluetooth姞. Please see your
phone Owners’ Manual for specific instructions on how to drop the Bluetooth姞
connection.
• If the phonebook entry is longer than 24
characters, it will only use the first 24
characters.
Edit Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries
Editing names in the phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries
cannot be deleted or edited.
• Press the
button to begin.
61
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following
beep, say “Phonebook Edit”.
• You will then be asked for the name of the
phonebook entry that you wish to edit.
• Next, choose the number designation
(home, work, mobile, or other) that you wish
to edit.
• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are
editing.
After you are finished editing an entry in the
phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to
edit another entry in the phonebook, call the
number you just edited, or return to the main
menu.
“Phonebook Edit” can be used to add another
phone number to a name entry that already
exists in the phonebook. For example, the entry
John Doe may have a mobile and a home
number, but you can add “John Doe’s” work
number later using the “Phonebook Edit” feature.
NOTE:
Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
Delete Uconnect™ Phonebook Entry
Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect™ Phonebook
Entries
• Press the
• Press the
button to begin.
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following
beep, say “Phonebook Delete”.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following
beep, say “Phonebook Erase All”.
• After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu,
you will then be asked for the name of the
entry that you wish to delete. You can either
say the name of a phonebook entry that you
wish to delete or you can say “List Names” to
hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the
button
entries from the list, press the
• The Uconnect™ Phone will ask you to verify
that you wish to delete all the entries from the
phonebook.
while the Uconnect™ Phone is playing the
desired entry and say “Delete”.
• After you enter the name, the Uconnect™
Phone will ask you which designation you
wish to delete; home, work, mobile, other, or
all. Say the designation you wish to delete.
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the
current language is deleted.
62
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries
cannot be deleted or edited.
• After confirmation, the phonebook entries
will be deleted.
• Note that only the phonebook in the current
language is deleted.
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries
cannot be deleted or edited.
List All Uconnect™ Phonebook Names
• Press the
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following
beep, say “Phonebook List Names”.
• The Uconnect™ Phone will play the names
of all the phonebook entries, including the
downloaded phonebook entries, if available.
• To call one of the names in the list, press the
button during the playing of the desired name, and say “Call”.
NOTE:
The user can also exercise “Edit” or “Delete” operations at this point.
• The Uconnect™ Phone will then prompt you
as to the number designation you wish to
call.
• The selected number will be dialed.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed
through the Uconnect™ Phone if the feature(s)
are available on your mobile service plan. For
example, if your mobile service plan provides
three-way calling, this feature can be accessed
through the Uconnect™ Phone. Check with
your mobile service provider for the features
that you have.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No
Call Currently in Progress
When you receive a call on your mobile phone,
the Uconnect™ Phone will interrupt the vehicle
audio system, if on, and will ask if you would
button to
like to answer the call. Press the
accept the call. To reject the call, press and
button until you hear a single
hold the
beep indicating that the incoming call was
rejected.
Making a Second Call While Current Call in
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently
on a call, press the
button and say “Dial”
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call
Currently in Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have
another incoming call, you will hear the same
network tones for call waiting that you normally
hear when using your mobile phone. Press the
button to place the current call on hold and
answer the incoming call.
Place/Retrieve a Call From Hold
To put a call on hold, press the
button until
you hear a single beep. This indicates that the
call is on hold. To bring the call back from hold,
button until you hear a
press and hold the
single beep.
NOTE:
The Uconnect™ Phone compatible phones
in the market today do not support rejecting
an incoming call when another call is in
progress. Therefore, the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
or “Call” followed by the phone number or
phonebook entry you wish to call. The first call
will be on hold while the second call is in
progress. To go back to the first call, refer to
“Toggling Between Calls”. To combine two
calls, refer to “Conference Call”.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one
button until you hear a
on hold), press the
single beep indicating that the active and hold
status of the two calls have switched. Only one
call can be placed on hold at one time.
63
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and
button
one on hold), press and hold the
until you hear a double beep indicating that the
two calls have been joined into one conference
call.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the
button while a call is in progress, and make a
second phone call, as described under “Making a Second Call While Current Call in Progress”. After the second call has established,
button until you hear a
press and hold the
double beep, indicating that the two calls have
been joined into one conference call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press
button. Only the active call(s) will be
the
terminated and if there is a call on hold, it will
become the new active call. If the active call is
terminated by the phone far end, a call on hold
may not become active automatically. This is
cell phone-dependent. To bring the call back
button until
from hold, press and hold the
you hear a single beep.
64
Redial
• Press the
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following
beep, say “Redial”.
• The Uconnect™ Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your mobile phone.
NOTE:
This may not be the last number dialed from
the Uconnect™ Phone.
for a certain duration, after which the call is
automatically
transferred
from
the
Uconnect™ Phone to the mobile phone.
• An active call is automatically transferred to
the mobile phone after the ignition key is
switched to OFF.
Uconnect™ Phone Features
Language Selection
To change the language that the Uconnect™
Phone is using:
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone
call on the Uconnect™ Phone after the vehicle
ignition key has been switched to OFF. Call
continuation functionality available on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
• Press the
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a
call can continue on the Uconnect™ Phone
either until the call ends, or until the vehicle
battery condition dictates cessation of the
call on the Uconnect™ Phone and transfer of
the call to the mobile phone.
• Continue to follow the system prompts to
complete language selection.
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a
call can continue on the Uconnect™ Phone
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following
beep, say the name of the language you
wish to switch to (English, Dutch, French,
German, Italian, or Spanish, if so equipped).
After selecting one of the languages, all
prompts and voice commands will be in that
language.
NOTE:
After every Uconnect™ Phone language
change operation, only the language-
specific 32-name phonebook is usable. The
paired phone name is not language-specific
and usable across all languages.
For command translations and alternate commands in supported languages, refer to “Command Translations.”
Emergency Assistance — If Equipped
If you are in an emergency and the mobile
phone is reachable:
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the
emergency number for your area.
If the phone is not reachable and the
Uconnect™ Phone is operational, you may
reach the emergency number as follows:
• Press the
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following
beep, say “Emergency” and the Uconnect™
Phone will instruct the paired mobile phone
to call the emergency number.
NOTE:
• The default number is 112. The number
dialed may not be applicable with the
available mobile service and area.
• If supported, this number may be programmable on some systems. To do this,
press the
button and say “Setup”,
followed by “Emergency”.
• The Uconnect™ Phone does slightly
lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the mobile
phone directly.
WARNING!
To use your Uconnect™ Phone System in an
emergency, your mobile phone must be:
• turned on,
• paired to the Uconnect™ System,
• and have network coverage.
Breakdown Service — If Equipped
If you need Breakdown service:
• Press the
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following
beep, say “Breakdown service”.
NOTE:
The Breakdown service number has to be
setup before using. To setup, press the
button and say “Setup, Breakdown Service”
and follow prompts.
Paging
To learn how to page refer to “Working with
Automated Systems”. Paging works properly
except for pagers of certain companies which
time out a little too soon to work properly with
the Uconnect™ Phone.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to
“Working with Automated Systems”.
Working with Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one
generally has to press numbers on the mobile
phone keypad while navigating through an
automated telephone system.
You can use your Uconnect™ Phone to access
a voice mail system or an automated service,
such as a paging service or automated customer service. Some services require immedi-
65
ate response selection. In some instances, that
may be too quick for use of the Uconnect™
Phone.
will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as
tones over the phone.
Uconnect™ Phone will not repeat a phone
number before you dial it).
When calling a number with your Uconnect™
Phone that normally requires you to enter in a
touch-tone sequence on your mobile phone
button and
keypad, you can press the
NOTE:
• You may not hear all of the tones due to
mobile phone network configurations;
this is normal.
• Some paging and voice mail systems
have system time out settings that are too
short and may not allow the use of this
feature.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following
beep, say:
say the sequence you wish to enter followed by
the word “Send”. For example, if required to
enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4 6
#), you can press the
button and say, “3
7 4 6 # Send”. Saying a number, or sequence of
numbers, followed by “Send”, is also to be
used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure, and to
leave a number on a pager.
You can also send stored Uconnect™ Phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access
to voice mail and pager entries. To use this
feature, dial the number you wish to call and
then press the
button and say “Send”.
The system will prompt you to enter the name or
number and say the name of the phonebook
entry you wish to send. The Uconnect™ Phone
66
Barge In - Overriding Prompts
The “Voice Command” button can be used
when you wish to skip part of a prompt and
issue your voice command immediately. For
example, if a prompt is asking “Would you like
to pair a phone, clear aѧ,” you could press the
button and say, “Pair a Phone” to select
that option without having to listen to the rest of
the voice prompt.
Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the
system from confirming your choices (e.g., the
• Press the
button to begin.
− “Setup Confirmations Prompts On”
− “Setup Confirmations Prompts Off”
Phone and Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium
display such as the instrument panel cluster,
and supported by your mobile phone, the
Uconnect™ Phone will provide notification to
inform you of your phone and network status
when you are attempting to make a phone call
using Uconnect™ Phone. The status is given
for roaming, network signal strength, phone
battery strength, etc.
Dialing Using the Mobile Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your mobile
phone keypad and still use the Uconnect™
Phone (while dialing via the mobile phone
keypad, the user must exercise caution and
take precautionary safety measures). By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth姞 mo-
bile phone, the audio will be played through
your vehicle’s audio system. The Uconnect™
Phone will work the same as if you dial the
number using Voice Command.
NOTE:
Certain brands of mobile phones do not
send the dial ring to the Uconnect™ Phone
to play it on the vehicle audio system, so
you will not hear it. Under this situation,
after successfully dialing a number the user
may feel that the call did not go through
even though the call is in progress. Once
your call is answered, you will hear the
audio.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute Off)
When you mute the Uconnect™ Phone, you will
still be able to hear the conversation coming
from the other party, but the other party will not
be able to hear you. In order to mute the
Uconnect™ Phone:
• Press the
button.
• Following the beep, say “Mute”.
In order to un-mute the Uconnect™ Phone:
• Press the
button.
List Paired Mobile Phone Names
• Following the beep, say “Mute off”.
• Press the
Advanced Phone Connectivity
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following
beep, say “Setup Phone Pairing”.
Transfer Call to and from Mobile Phone
The Uconnect™ Phone allows ongoing calls to
be transferred from your mobile phone to the
Uconnect™ Phone without terminating the call.
To transfer an ongoing call from your
Uconnect™ Phone paired mobile phone to the
Uconnect™ Phone or vice versa, press the
button and say “Transfer Call”.
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the
Uconnect™ Phone and Mobile Phone
Your mobile phone can be paired with many
different electronic devices, but can only be
actively connected with one electronic device
at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the
Bluetooth姞 connection between a Uconnect™
Phone paired mobile phone and the
Uconnect™ Phone, follow the instructions described in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
button to begin.
• When prompted, say “List Phones”.
• The Uconnect™ Phone will play the phone
names of all paired mobile phones in order
from the highest to the lowest priority. To
“select” or “delete” a paired phone being
button and say
announced, press the
“Select” or “Delete”. Also, see the next two
sections for an alternate way to “select” or
“delete” a paired phone.
Select Another Mobile Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using
another phone paired with the Uconnect™
Phone.
• Press the
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following
beep, say “Setup Select Phone” and follow
the prompts.
67
• You can also press the
button at any
time while the list is being played, and then
choose the phone that you wish to select.
• The selected phone will be used for the next
phone call. If the selected phone is not
available, the Uconnect™ Phone will return
to using the highest priority phone present in
or near (approximately within 30 ft [9 m]) the
vehicle.
Delete Uconnect™ Phone Paired Mobile
Phones
• Press the
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following
beep, say “Setup Phone Pairing”.
• At the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow
the prompts.
• You can also press the
button at any
time while the list is being played, and then
choose the phone you wish to delete.
Things You Should Know About
Your Uconnect™ Phone
Uconnect™ Phone Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the Uconnect™ Phone
button and say
features, press the
“Uconnect™ Tutorial”.
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the
Uconnect™ Phone recognizing their voice
commands or numbers, the Uconnect™ Phone
Voice Training feature may be used. To enter
this training mode, follow one of the two following procedures:
when the vehicle is parked with the engine
running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched OFF.
This procedure may be repeated with a new
user. The system will adapt to the last trained
voice only.
To restore the Voice Command system to factory default settings, enter the Voice Training
session via the above procedure and follow the
prompts.
Voice Command
From outside the Uconnect™ Phone mode
(e.g., from radio mode)
• For best performance, adjust the rearview
mirror to provide at least 1⁄2 in (1 cm) gap
between the overhead console (if equipped)
and the mirror.
• Press and hold the
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
button for five
seconds until the session begins, or,
• Press the
button and say the “Setup,
Voice Training” command.
Repeat the words and phrases when prompted
by the Uconnect™ Phone. For best results, the
Voice Training session should be completed
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you
would speak to a person sitting a few feet/
meters away from you.
• Make sure that no one other than you is
speaking during a Voice Command period.
• Performance is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
68
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
• fully closed windows,
• dry weather conditions.
• Even though the system is designed for
users speaking in European English, Dutch,
French, German, Italian, or Spanish accents,
the system may not always work for some.
• When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail, or when sending a
page, at the end of speaking the digit string,
make sure to say “Send”.
• Storing names in the phonebook when the
vehicle is not in motion is recommended.
• Numbers must be spoken in single digits.
“800” must be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not
“eight hundred”.
• You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
• Even though international dialing for most
number combinations is supported, some
shortcut dialing number combinations may
not be supported.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down.
Phone Far End Audio Performance
• Audio quality is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the Uconnect™ Phonebook.
• low road noise,
• Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect™
Phone Local) name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar.
• fully closed windows,
• smooth road surface,
• dry weather conditions, and
• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo,
and loudness to a large degree rely on the
phone and network, and not the Uconnect™
Phone.
• Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be
reduced by lowering the in-vehicle audio
volume.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down.
Bluetooth姞 Communication Link
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the Uconnect™ Phone. When this
happens, the connection can generally be reestablished by switching the phone off/on. Your
mobile phone is recommended to remain in
Bluetooth姞 ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to
either ON or ACC position, or after a language
change, you must wait at least five seconds
prior to using the system.
• operation from the driver seat.
69
70
71
72
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate(s)
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
asterisk (*)
star
plus (+)
hash (#)
all
all of them
Breakdown service
call
cancel
confirmation prompts. confirmation
continue
delete
dial
Primary
download
Dutch
edit
emergency
English
delete all
Espanol
Francais
German
help
home
Italian
language
list names
list phones
main menu.
mobile
mute on
mute off
new entry
no
Voice Commands
Alternate(s)
Nederlands
erase all
Deutsch
Italiano
return to main menu
Primary
pager
pair a phone
phone pairing
phonebook
previous
redial
select phone
send
set up
Voice Commands
Alternate(s)
beeper
transfer call
Uconnect™ Tutorial
try again
voice training
work
yes
pairing
phonebook
select
phone settings or
phone set up
system training
73
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED
When you press the Voice Command
Voice Command System Operation
button, you will hear a beep. The beep is your
signal to give a command.
This Voice Command system allows you to control your AM, FM
radio, disc player, and a memo
recorder.
NOTE:
Take care to speak into the Voice Interface
System as calmly and normally as possible.
The ability of the Voice Interface System to
recognize user voice commands may be
negatively affected by rapid speaking or a
raised voice level.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be
used only in safe driving conditions following
local laws. All attention should be kept on the
roadway ahead. Failure to do so may result in
a collision causing serious injury or death.
74
NOTE:
If you do not say a command within a few
seconds, the system will present you with a
list of options.
If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it
lists options, press the Voice Command
button, listen for the beep, and say your command.
Pressing the Voice Command
button
while the system is speaking is known as
“barging in.” The system will be interrupted,
and after the beep, you can add or change
commands. This will become helpful once you
start to learn the options.
NOTE:
At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”, “Help” or “Main Menu”.
These commands are universal and can be
used from any menu. All other commands can
be used depending upon the active application.
When using this system, you should speak
clearly and at a normal speaking volume.
The system will best recognize your speech if
the windows are closed, and the heater/air
conditioning fan is set to low.
At any point, if the system does not recognize
one of your commands, you will be prompted to
repeat it.
To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice
Command
button and say “Help” or
“Main Menu”.
Commands
The Voice Command system understands two
types of commands. Universal commands are
available at all times. Local commands are
available if the supported radio mode is active.
Changing the Volume
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice
button.
Command
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to
adjust the volume to a comfortable level while
the Voice Command system is speaking.
Please note the volume setting for Voice Command is different than the audio system.
Main Menu
Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice
button. You may say “Main
Command
Radio AM (or Radio Long Wave or Radio
Medium Wave — If Equipped)
To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio
AM”. In this mode, you may say the following
commands:
• “Frequency” (to change the frequency)
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous
station)
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Disc
To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc”. In this
mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Track” (#) (to change the track)
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Memo
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say
“Memo”. In this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “New Memo” (to record a new memo) —
During the recording, you may press the
Voice Command
button to stop re-
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
Radio FM
To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio
FM”. In this mode, you may say the following
commands:
• “Radio” (to switch to the radio mode)
• “Frequency” (to change the frequency)
cording. You proceed by saying one of the
following commands:
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
− “Save” (to save the memo)
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous
station)
− “Continue” (to continue recording)
Menu” to switch to the main menu.
• “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
• “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
• “System Setup” (to switch to system setup)
− “Delete” (to delete the recording)
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
75
• “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded
memos) — During the playback you may
button to
press the Voice Command
stop playing memos. You proceed by saying
one of the following commands:
− “Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
− “Next” (to play the next memo)
− “Previous” (to play the previous memo)
− “Delete” (to delete a memo)
• “Delete All” (to delete all memos)
System Setup
To switch to system setup, you may say on of
the following:
• “Change to system setup”
• “Main menu system setup”
• “Switch to system setup”
• “Change to setup”
• “Main menu setup” or
• “Switch to setup”
76
In this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Language English”
• “Language French”
• “Language Spanish”
• “Language Dutch”
• “Language Deutsch”
• “Language Italian”
• “Tutorial”
• “Voice Training”
NOTE:
Keep in mind that you have to press the
button first and wait
Voice Command
for the beep before speaking the “Barge In”
commands.
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect™ Voice “Voice Training”
feature may be used.
1. Press the Voice Command
button,
say “System Setup” and once you are in that
menu then say “Voice Training.” This will train
your own voice to the system and will improve
recognition.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when
prompted by Uconnect™ Voice. For best results, the Voice Training session should be
completed when the vehicle is parked, engine
running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off. This procedure may be repeated
with a new user. The system will adapt to the
last trained voice only.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint
System of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
(Continued)
Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If
Equipped
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts. In a collision, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly.
Front Seat Adjustment
The seat can be adjusted forward or rearward
by using a bar located by the front of the seat
cushion, near the floor. While sitting in the seat,
lift up on the bar located under the seat cushion
and move the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have reached the
desired position. Then, using body pressure,
move forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by using the ratcheting handle, located on
the outboard side of the seat. Pull upward on
the handle to raise the seat; push downward on
the handle to lower the seat.
Manual Seat Adjustment
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
result in loss of control which could cause a
collision and serious injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seatbelts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seatbelt.
Seat Height Adjustment
77
Front Seatback Recline
Easy Entry Seats — Two Door Models
Lean forward before lifting the handle, then
lean back to the desired position and release
the handle. Lift the handle to return the seatback to an upright position.
Pull upward on the recline lever (toward the rear
of the vehicle) and slide the entire seat forward.
NOTE:
• The front passenger seats have a track
memory, which returns the seat to just
past the halfway point of the track regardless of its original position.
• The recliner and easy entry levers should
not be used during the automatic returning of the seat to its sitting position.
Easy Entry Lever
Recline Lever
Tip n’ Slide Seats — Two Door
Models
This feature allows the front seats to be rotated
toward the instrument panel to allow easier
entry into the rear seats.
Driver and Passenger Seats
In addition to Easy Entry, the driver and passenger seats are also equipped with Tip n’
Slide. This feature allow for easier entry for rear
passengers.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious
injury or death.
Pull upward on the recline lever and slide the
seat the entire seat forward (Easy Entry).
Easy Entry Seat
78
To return the seat to a sitting position, rotate the
seatback upright until it locks and push the seat
rearward until the track locks.
With the seat forward, pull the entire seat assembly toward the instrument panel.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front driver and passenger seats may be equipped with heaters in both
the seat cushions and seatbacks.
There are two heated seat switches that allow
the driver and passenger to operate the seats
independently. The controls for each seat are
located on a switch bank near the bottom
center of the instrument panel.
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat
settings. Amber indicator lights in each switch
indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator
lights will illuminate for HIGH, one for LOW and
none for OFF.
Press the switch once to select
HIGH-level heating. Press the
switch a second time to select
LOW-level heating. Press the
switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF.
When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the
heater will provide a boosted heat level during
the first four minutes of operation. Then, the
heat output will drop to the normal HIGH-level.
If the HIGH-level setting is selected, the system
will automatically switch to LOW-level after approximately 30 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the number of illuminated
LEDs changes from two to one, indicating the
change. The LOW-level setting will turn OFF
automatically after approximately 30 minutes.
NOTE:
When a heat setting is selected, heat will be
felt within two to five minutes.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other
physical condition must exercise care when
using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not place anything on the seat that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or
cushion. This may cause the seat heater to
overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been
overheated could cause serious burns due
to the increased surface temperature of the
seat.
CAUTION!
Repeated overheating of the seat could damage the heating element and/or degrade the
material of the seat.
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk
of injury by restricting head movement in the
event of a rear impact. Head restraints should
be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint
is located above the top of your ear.
(Continued)
79
Fold and Tumble Rear Seat — Two
Door Models
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be
properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints
should never be adjusted while the vehicle is
in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed
could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
Front Head Restraints
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
press the adjustment button, located on the
base of the head restraint, and push downward
on the head restraint.
NOTE:
• Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be
necessary to reposition the front seats.
• Be sure that the front seats are fully
upright and positioned forward. This will
allow the rear seat to fold down easily.
Adjustment Button
NOTE:
The rear head restraints are not adjustable.
To remove the head restraint, pull upward on
the head restraint to it’s highest position, push
in both buttons at the base of each head
restraint rod, and simultaneously pull up on the
head restraint.
Rear Head Restraints
The rear seat is equipped with nonadjustable
head restraints. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
in “Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for information on child seat tether routing.
80
1. Lift the seatback release lever and fold the
seatback forward.
Rear Seat Release
2. Slowly flip the entire seat forward.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly.
• In a collision, you or others in your vehicle
could be injured if seats are not properly
latched to their floor attachments. Always
be sure that the seats are fully latched.
Folding Rear Seat
Release Bar Location
3. Return the seat to the normal position.
4. Raise the rear seatback using the assist
strap and firmly lock the seat into position.
Removing the Rear Seat — Two
Door Models
1. Fold the rear seat forward following steps 1
through 3 under “Fold and Tumble Rear Seat”
in this section.
2. Press down on the release bar on each side,
and pull the seat out and away from the lower
bracket.
3. Remove the seat from the vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Replacing the Rear Seat — Two
Door Models
Reverse the steps for removing the seat.
WARNING!
• To help protect against personal injury,
passengers should not be seated in the
rear cargo area with the rear seat folded
down or removed from the vehicle.
• The rear cargo space is intended for load
carrying purposes only, not for passengers
who should sit in seats and use seat belts.
(Continued)
81
60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat —
Four Door Models
To provide additional storage area, each rear
seat can be folded flat to allow for extended
cargo space and still maintain some rear seating room.
NOTE:
• Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be
necessary to reposition the front seat to
its mid-track position.
• Be sure that the front seats are fully
upright and positioned forward. This will
allow the rear seat to fold down easily.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly.
To Fold Down the Rear Seat
Locate the pull strap (lower outboard side of
seat), and pull it toward you until the seatback
releases.
NOTE:
If the rear seatback is not fully latched, the
center shoulder belt will not be able to be
extended for use. If you cannot extend the
center shoulder belt, make sure your seatback is fully latched.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely
locked into position. If the seatback in not
securely locked into position the seat will not
provide the proper stability for child seats
and/or passengers. An improperly latched
seat could cause serious injury.
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
(Continued)
Pull Strap
82
To Raise the Rear Seat
Raise the seatback and lock it into place. If
interference from the cargo area prevents the
seatback from fully locking, you will have difficulty returning the seat to its proper position.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
Release both the hood latches.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving
your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it
could open when the vehicle is in motion and
block your vision. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death.
LIGHTS
Multifunction Lever
Hood Latch
Raise the hood and locate the safety latch,
located in the middle of the hood opening.
Push the latch to the left side of the vehicle, to
open the hood. You may have to push down
slightly on the hood before pushing the safety
latch. Insert the support rod into the slot on the
hood.
To close the hood, remove the support rod from
the hood panel and place it in the retaining clip.
Lower the hood slowly. Secure both of the hood
latches.
The multifunction lever controls the operation of
the position lights, headlights, headlight beam
selection, passing lights (flash-to-pass), fog
lights (if equipped), instrument panel light dimming and turn signals. The lever is located on
the left side of the steering column.
Headlights and Position Lights
Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first
detent for position lights and instrument panel
lights. Turn to the second detent for headlight
operation.
NOTE:
Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions. This will usually clear as
atmospheric conditions change to allow the
condensation to change back into a vapor.
Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate
the clearing process.
Headlight Switch
Multifunction Lever
83
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights
on or off according to ambient light levels. To
turn the system on, turn the end of the multifunction lever to the AUTO position (third detent). When the system is on, the Headlight
Time Delay feature is also on. This means the
headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds
after you turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
position. To turn the Automatic System off, turn
the end of the multifunction lever out of the
AUTO position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the
headlights will turn on in the Automatic
mode.
Headlights with Wipers (Available
with Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will
turn on approximately 10 seconds after the
wipers are turned on if the multifunction lever is
placed in the AUTO position. In addition, the
headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
The Headlights with Wipers feature can be
turned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — if equipped. Refer
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Turn Signals
Headlight Switch
84
Move the multifunction lever up or down and
the arrows on each side of the instrument
cluster flash to show proper operation of the
front and rear turn signal lights.
Turn Signal Operation
NOTE:
• If either light remains on and does not
flash, or there is a very fast flash rate,
check for a defective outside light bulb. If
an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator
bulb is defective.
• A tone will chime if the turn signals are
left on for more than 1 mile (2 km).
Lane Change Assist
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving
beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or
left) will flash three times then automatically turn
off.
Lights-On Reminder
The front fog light switch is in the
multifunction lever. To activate the front
fog lights, turn on the position lights or
headlights and pull out the end of the
lever.
If the headlights or parking lights are on after
the ignition is turned OFF, the high beam indicator light will remain illuminated and a chime
will sound when the driver’s door is opened.
Rear Fog Lights — If Equipped
To activate the rear fog lights, turn on
the front position lights or headlights,
pull out the end of the multifunction
lever and rotate the lever to the last
detent.
Instrument Panel Dimmer
Headlight Dimmer Switch
Rotate the center portion of the lever to the
extreme bottom position to fully dim the instrument panel lights and prevent the interior lights
from illuminating when a door is opened.
Push the multifunction lever away from you to
switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the
lever toward you to switch the headlights back
to low beam.
Rotate the center portion of the lever up to
increase the brightness of the instrument panel
lights when the parking lights or headlights are
on.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever
toward the steering wheel. This will turn on the
high beam headlights until the lever is released.
Fog Light Operation
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to
the next detent position to brighten the odometer and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on.
85
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to
the last detent to turn on the interior lighting.
Cargo Lamp
The courtesy and dome lights will turn on when
the front doors are opened, by rotating the
control for the dimmer switch on the multifunction lever fully upward, or if equipped, when the
UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
The rear cargo light may be turned on by
pressing the lens. Press the lens a second time
to turn the light off.
The sports bar reading lights (available on
four-door models) can be turned on by pressing the switches, located on either side of the
lens. Press a switch a second time to turn the
light off.
Dimmer Control
Rear Cargo Light
Interior Lights
When a door is open and the interior lights are
on, rotating the dimmer control to the extreme
bottom position will cause all the interior lights
to turn off. This is also known as the “Party”
mode because it allows the doors to stay open
for extended periods of time without discharging the vehicle’s battery.
The overhead light will come on when a door is
opened. It may also be turned on by rotating
the control for the dimmer switch on the multifunction lever fully upward.
The overhead light will automatically turn off in
approximately 10 minutes if a door is left open
or the dimmer control is left in the dome light
position. Turn the ignition switch ON to restore
the overhead light operation.
86
Sports Bar Reading Light
Headlight Leveling System — If
Equipped
This system allows the driver to maintain proper
headlight beam position with the road surface
regardless of vehicle load. The headlight leveling switch is located on the lower switch bank
(below the climate controls).
To operate: With the low beams on,
push the upper side or lower side
of the headlight leveling switch until the appropriate number, which
corresponds to the load listed on
the following chart, illuminates on
the switch.
NOTE:
Headlight Leveling will not activate when the
parking lights or high beam headlights are
on.
0
Driver only, or driver and front passenger.
1
All seating positions occupied.
2
All seating positions occupied, plus
an evenly distributed load in the
luggage compartment. The total
weight of passengers and load
does not exceed the maximum load
capacity of the vehicle.
3
Driver, plus an evenly distributed
load in the luggage compartment.
The total weight of the driver and
load does not exceed the maximum
load capacity of the vehicle.
Calculations based on a passenger weight of
165 lbs (75 kg).
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND
WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer control lever is
located on the right side of the steering column.
The front wipers are operated by rotating a
switch, located at the end of the lever. For
information on using the rear window wiper/
washer, refer to “Rear Window Features” in
“Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle”.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
87
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the
second detent past the intermittent settings for
low-speed wiper operation.
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the third
detent past the intermittent settings for highspeed wiper operation.
CAUTION!
In cold weather, always turn off the wiper
switch and allow the wipers to return to the
park position before turning off the engine. If
the wiper switch is left on and the wipers
freeze to the windshield, damage to the wiper
motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a
variable pause between cycles, desirable. Rotate the end of the lever to the first detent
position for one of five intermittent settings. The
delay cycle can be set anywhere between 1 to
18 seconds.
Front Wiper Control
88
Front Wiper Control
NOTE:
The wiper delay times depend on vehicle
speed. If the vehicle is moving less than
10 mph (16 km/h), delay times will be
doubled.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and
hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled
while in the delay range, the wiper will start and
continue to operate for two or three wipe cycles
after the lever is released, and then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected.
wheel, move the steering column up or down,
as desired. Pull upwards on the lever to lock the
column firmly in place.
If the lever is pulled while in the off position, the
wipers will operate for two or three wipe cycles
and then turn off.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision. You might not
see other vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid
sudden icing of the windshield during freezing
weather, warm the windshield with defroster
before and during windshield washer use.
Mist Feature
Push down on the wiper lever to activate a
single wipe to clear off road mist or spray from
a passing vehicle. As long as the lever is held
down, the wipers will continue to operate.
Mist Control
NOTE:
The mist feature does not activate the
washer pump; therefore, no washer fluid will
be sprayed on the windshield. The wash
function must be used in order to spray the
windshield with washer fluid.
TILT STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. The tilt lever is
located on the steering column, below the turn
signal lever.
Push down on the lever to unlock the steering
column. With one hand firmly on the steering
Tilt Steering Column Lever
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose control
of the vehicle. Be sure the steering column is
locked before driving your vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury
or death.
89
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control
takes over accelerator operations at speeds
greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel.
1 — ON/OFF
4 — CANCEL
2 — RES +
3 — SET -
NOTE:
In order to ensure proper operation, the
Electronic Speed Control System has been
designed to shut down if multiple Speed
Control functions are operated at the same
90
time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed
Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON/OFF
button and resetting the desired vehicle set
speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate. To
turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a
second time. The Cruise Indicator Light will turn
off. The system should be turned off when not in
use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system
on when not in use is dangerous. You could
accidentally set the system or cause it to go
faster than you want. You could lose control
and have a collision. Always leave the system
OFF when you are not using it.
press the SET (-) button and release. Release
the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at
the selected speed.
NOTE:
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
speed and on level ground before pressing
the SET button.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the
CANCEL button, or normal brake pressure
while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set
speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF button or
turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set
speed memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the
RES (+) button and release. Resume can be
used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Vary the Speed Setting
To Set a Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When
the vehicle has reached the desired speed,
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you
can increase speed by pushing the RES (+)
button. If the button is continually pressed, the
set speed will continue to increase until the
button is released, then the new set speed will
be established.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to
maintain the vehicle set speed.
Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a
1 mph (2 km/h) increase in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
increase of 1 mph (2 km/h).
NOTE:
The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills. A slight
speed change on moderate hills is normal.
To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed
Control is set, push the SET (-) button. If the
button is continually held in the SET (-) position,
the set speed will continue to decrease until the
button is released. Release the button when the
desired speed is reached, and the new set
speed will be established.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may
occur so it may be preferable to drive without
Electronic Speed Control.
Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a
1 mph (2 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (2 km/h).
To Accelerate for Passing
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous
where the system cannot maintain a constant
speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the
conditions, and you could lose control and
have a collision. Do not use Electronic Speed
Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLET
There are two 12 Volt (13 Amp) auxiliary power
outlets that can provide power for accessories
designed for use with the standard power outlet
adapters. The front power outlet, located in the
lower portion of the instrument panel, has a
snap-on plastic cap so that it can be covered
when not in use.
When the optional cigar lighter heating element
is used in the power outlet, it heats when
pushed in and pops out automatically when
ready for use. To preserve the heating element, do not hold the lighter in the heating
position.
Press the accelerator as you would normally.
When the pedal is released, the vehicle will
return to the set speed.
91
NOTE:
Do not exceed the maximum power of 160
Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt
(13 Amp) power rating is exceeded the fuse
protecting the system will need to be replaced.
On vehicles equipped with a rear subwoofer,
there is a power outlet located in the right rear
cargo area.
Rear Power Outlet — If Equipped
Front Power Outlet
The front power outlet is powered from the
ignition switch. Power is available when the
ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position.
Items plugged into this power outlet may discharge the battery and/or prevent the engine
from starting.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type
of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt
outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while
driving the vehicle.
(Continued)
92
WARNING! (Continued)
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even
when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the
vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently
to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,
coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will
degrade the battery even more quickly.
Only use these intermittently and with
greater caution.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• After the use of high-power draw accessories, or long periods of the vehicle not being
started (with accessories still plugged in),
the vehicle must be driven a sufficient
length of time to allow the alternator to
recharge the vehicle’s battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug.
CUPHOLDERS
Front Cupholders
STORAGE
Console Storage Compartment
To lock or unlock the storage compartment,
insert the ignition key and turn. To open the
storage compartment, press the latch and lift
the cover.
Front Cupholders
Rear Cupholders
The rear cupholders are located on the back of
the center console.
The front cupholders are located in the center
console.
Center Console
Rear Cupholders
93
Rear Storage Compartment
DUAL TOP — IF EQUIPPED
The rear cargo area storage compartment
cover is held by a spring-loaded latch. In order
to remove the rear storage compartment cover,
use the following procedure:
If your vehicle is equipped with a Dual Top, you
must remove one of the tops from the vehicle. If the soft top is removed, the pivot
brackets must also be removed from the
sport bar. The soft top was installed at the
factory for shipping purposes only. The soft
top and the hard top are to be used independently. Removal is mandatory to prevent any
possible wear and tear on the soft top. Your
vehicle warranty will not cover damage resulting from both tops remaining on the vehicle at
the same time for extended periods of time.
NOTE:
The rear storage compartment latch should
not be used as cargo tie-down.
1. Flip up the pull loop so it is perpendicular
(straight up) to the top surface of the tray.
2. Pull up on the loop and twist it 90 degrees,
so it is parallel to the slotted hole in the tray.
3. Open the rear compartment cover.
• Two Sunrider姞
equipped)
secure
straps
(if
• Two rear swing gate brackets
2. Remove the hard top. Refer to “Freedom Top
Three-Piece Modular Hard Top — Front/Rear
Panel Removal” in this section.
3. Remove the soft top bow assembly pivot
bracket screws (two per side) using a #T30
Torx姞 head driver.
Removing the Soft Top
1. Locate and remove the two boxes that contain the following items:
• Right and left door frames
• Door frame attachment knobs (four for
two-door models, six for four-door models)
• Right and left quarter windows
• Rear window
Rear Storage Cover
94
• Two rear window roll up straps
4. Disconnect the knuckles from the left and
right metal pivot brackets. Remove the soft top
from the vehicle and store in a clean, dry
location.
1. Locate and remove the following items prior
to hard top removal:
NOTE:
To aid in disconnecting the knuckles, you
may carefully tap on the knuckles using a
rubber mallet.
• Right and left door frames
• Door frame attachment knobs (four for twodoor models, six for four-door models)
• Right and left quarter windows
• Rear window
6. Reinstall the hard top. Refer to “Freedom
Top Three-Piece Modular Hard Top — Front/
Rear Panel Installation” in this section.
2. Remove the hard top. Refer to “Freedom Top
Three-Piece Modular Hard Top — Front/Rear
Panel Removal” in this section.
3. Install the door frames. Refer to “Door
Frame” in this section.
Installing the Soft Top
5. Unzip the zipper on the sport bar cover to
expose the pivot brackets. Remove the brackets using a #T30 Torx姞 head driver. Recover
and re-zip the sports bar cover. Store the pivot
brackets and screws in a safe place.
NOTE:
The following procedures are for first time
set up only. For future soft top procedures,
refer to “Soft Top” in this section.
95
4. If the soft top has been removed, follow
these steps to reinstall the soft top. If the soft
top is on the vehicle, proceed to step #5.
a. If the pivot brackets have been removed,
unzip the sport bar covers and attach the
pivot brackets to the sports bar with the four
screws that were removed using a #T30
Torx姞 head driver. Re-cover and re-zip the
sport bar covers.
NOTE:
To aid in reattaching the knuckles, you may
carefully tap on the knuckles using a rubber
mallet.
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the screws. You can strip
the screws if they are overtightened.
d. Screw the pivot screws back into place
using a #T30 Torx姞 head driver. Secure them
until they are snug, being careful not to
cross-thread the screws or overtighten.
b. Lay the soft top into the rear of the vehicle
with the bows pointing forward and the
curved portion of the bows facing upward.
c. Reattach the knuckles onto the metal
pivot brackets.
96
5. Remove the swing gate bar (black metal bar
for bottom of rear window) and set aside.
NOTE:
Be sure the wire harness in the left rear
corner is not tangled in the soft top bows
before you lift the top.
6. Unsnap and remove the black boot cover.
This cover should be discarded. It was intended as a protective cover for shipping only.
NOTE:
A visual instruction sheet is enclosed in the
dual top wrap.
7. Put up the soft top. Refer to “Soft Top —
Putting Up the Soft Top” in this section.
FREEDOM TOP™ THREE-PIECE
MODULAR HARD TOP — IF
EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
• The hard top is not designed to carry any
additional loads such as roof racks, spare
tires, building, hunting, or camping supplies, and/or luggage, etc. Also, it was not
designed as a structural member of the
vehicle, and thus cannot properly carry any
additional loads other than environmental
(rain, snow, etc.).
• Do not move your vehicle until the top has
been either fully attached to the windshield
frame and bodyside, or fully removed.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause
interior water damage, stains or mildew:
• It is recommended that the top be free of
water prior to panel removal. Removing the
top, opening a door or lowering a window
while the top is wet may allow water to drip
into the vehicles interior.
• The hard top assembly must be positioned
properly to ensure sealing. Improper installation can cause water to leak into the
vehicles interior.
• Careless handling and storage of the removable roof panels may damage the
seals, causing water to leak into the vehicles interior.
• The front panel(s) must be positioned properly to ensure sealing. Improper installation
can cause water to leak into the vehicles
interior.
Front Panel(s) Removal
NOTE:
Left panel must be removed before removing right panel.
1. Fold down the sun visor, and move it to the
side.
2. Turn the rear fasteners (knobs) (located on
the overhead speaker bar assembly) counterclockwise until they can be removed.
97
3. Turn the center L-shaped locks (two) from
the center of the roof panel.
5. Unlatch the header panel latch located at
the top of the windshield.
Lay the Freedom bag down so the loops and
hooks are facing downward. Unzip the bag and
fold back the outer flap. Release the Velcro on
the black panel divider and fold it back.
NOTE:
Ensure the front Freedom Top™ panel latch
is closed prior to inserting the panel into the
Freedom bag.
Insert the right side Freedom panel into the bag
with the latches facing downward.
4. Turn the rear L-shaped lock (located above
the shoulder belt anchorage).
6. Remove the left-hand panel.
To remove the right panel, follow the steps
above except for Step 3.
Freedom Top™ Storage Bag
Your vehicle comes with a Freedom Top™
storage bag that allows you to store your Freedom Top™ panels. The storage bag contains
two compartments and fits behind the rear
seat.
98
Unfold the black panel divider (ensure the
divider is laying flat). Secure the Velcro, located
at the center of the divider.
Unfold the outer flap and zip the Freedom bag
closed.
Insert the left-side Freedom panel into the bag
with the latches facing upward.
Lift the Freedom bag into the vehicle with the
hooks and straps facing the back of the rear
seat. Attach the clips at the bottom of the bag to
the child restraint anchorages, located at the
base of the rear seat.
NOTE:
Ensure the front Freedom panel latch is
closed prior to inserting the panel into the
bag.
Install the seat attachment strap (at the top of
the bag) through the loops.
99
Wrap the upper strap around the rear head
restraints and loop the strap through the
buckle. Pull on the strap to tighten the Freedom
bag securely against the rear seat.
Front Panel(s) Installation with Rear
Hard Top Removed
3. Reinstall the panel(s) using the same steps
for removal in reverse order.
1. Turn the left and right panels over and move
the spacer block (located on the rear of the
panel) upward 90 degrees.
Rear Hard Top Removal
1. Remove both front panels. Refer to “Front
Panel(s) Removal” in this section.
2. Open both doors.
3. Remove the two Torx姞 head screws that
secure the hard top at the B-pillar (near the top
of the door) using a #40 Torx姞 head driver
(Four–Door Only).
4. Remove the six Torx姞 head screws that
secure the hard top to the vehicle (along the
interior bodyside) using a #40 Torx姞 head
driver.
Front Panel(s) Installation
NOTE:
Set the panels on the windshield frame so
that there is no overhang. Also, make sure
that the panels are sitting flush with the
body.
1. Install the right panel first, then the left panel.
2. Reinstall the panel(s) using the same steps
for removal in reverse order.
100
NOTE:
The front panel(s) must be positioned properly to ensure sealing. Set the panels on the
windshield frame so that there is no overhang. Also, make sure that the panels are
sitting flush with the body.
2. Install the right panel first, then the left panel.
5. Open the swing gate all the way to ensure
clearance of the rear window glass. Lift the rear
window glass.
6. Locate the wire harness on the left rear
inside corner of the vehicle.
8. To remove the wiring harness press the tab
and pull to disconnect.
10. Close the swing gate.
11. Remove the hard top from the vehicle.
Place the hard top on a soft surface to prevent
damage.
CAUTION!
The removal of the Freedom Top requires four
adults located on each corner. Failure to follow this caution could damage the Freedom
Top.
7. Release the red locking tab by pulling outward.
9. To remove the washer hose, pinch the grips
on hose connector and pull.
101
Rear Hard Top Installation
NOTE:
If the door frames are installed from soft top
usage, they must be removed prior to installation of the hard top.
1. Inspect the hard top seals for damage and
replace if necessary.
2. Install the hard top using the same steps for
removal in reverse order.
Make sure that the hard top is sitting flush with
the body at the sides and check to ensure that
there is a uniform gap between the lift glass
and hard top.
NOTE:
• The Torx fasteners that attach the hard
top to the body should be torqued to 66 in
lb +/- 22 in lb (7.5 N·m +/- 2.5 N·m)
• It is not necessary to pinch connection
when reinstalling washer hose. Push on
until click is heard.
102
DOOR FRAME
WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on pavement with
the door frame(s) removed as you will lose the
protection that they can provide. This procedure is furnished for use during off-road operation only.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause
interior water damage, stains or mildew:
• Opening a door or lowering a window while
the top is wet may allow water to drip into
the vehicle’s interior.
• Careless handling and storage of the removable door frame(s) may damage the
seals, causing water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
• The door frame(s) must be positioned properly to ensure sealing. Improper installation
can cause water to leak into the vehicle’s
interior.
Door Frame Removal
1. Unscrew and remove the door frame attachment knobs (two per door).
WARNING!
Use both hands to remove the door frames.
The door frames will fold and could cause
injury if both hands are not used.
2. Place one hand on the upper rear and one
hand on the front of the door frame.
3. Pull the frame toward you with your rearward
hand to remove the frame from the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never store the door frames in your vehicle. In
an event of an accident, a loose door frame
many cause personal injury. If removed, always store the door frames outside of the
vehicle.
Door Frame Installation — Two-Door
Models
4. Screw the knobs back into the door frame
and fold for storage. Store in a secure location.
3. After the door frame pin has been set into
the body side hole, carefully set the front of the
door frame into the rubber seal at the top of the
windshield.
4. Starting with the front of the door frame, clip
it over the metal side bar and then clip the rear,
making sure that the material for the side bar
covers is not pinched by the door frame.
1. Unfold door frame and unscrew thumbscrews.
2. Set the door frame pin into the hole on top of
the body side, behind the door opening.
103
5. Starting with the front knob, screw in and
tighten both knobs. Repeat on the other side.
Door Frame Installation —
Four-Door Models
1. Install the rear door frame first.
2. Set the door frame pin into the hole on top of
the body side, just behind the rear door opening.
104
3. Position the top of the door frame against
the metal sport bar and press onto the side bar
making sure not to pinch the material of the
sports bar covers and to ensure it is properly
positioned on the seal above the front of the
rear door.
4. Loosely install the rear knob (long knob) to
hold the door rail in position.
5. Carefully set the front of the front door frame
in the rubber seal at the top of the windshield.
6. Clip the front of the door rail over the side
bar making sure that the material for the side
bar cover is not pinched by the door frame.
9. Tighten the front knob, then the rear most
knob, and then the middle knob. Repeat this
procedure for the other side.
7. Position the rear of the front door frame to lay
on top of the front of the rear door frame. Ensure
the seals are installed correctly to avoid water
leaks.
SOFT TOP — TWO DOOR MODELS
Please visit the owners section of Jeep.com
for instructional videos.
8. Loosely install both knobs beginning with
the front knob (long knob). Then, install the
middle knob (short knob) through the front and
rear door frames and screw into the top of the
B-pillar.
CAUTION!
The soft top is not designed to carry any
additional loads such as roof racks, spare
tires, building, hunting, or camping supplies,
and/or luggage, etc. Also, it was not designed
as a structural member of the vehicle and,
thus, cannot properly carry any additional
loads other than environmental (rain, snow,
etc.).
If the temperature is below 72°F (24°C) and/or
the top has been folded down for a period of
time, the top will appear to have shrunk when
you raise it, making it difficult to put up. This is
caused by a natural contraction of the vinyl
coating on the fabric top.
Place the vehicle in a warm area. Pull steadily
on the top fabric. The vinyl will stretch back to
its original size and the top can then be installed. If the temperature is 41°F (5°C) or
below, do not attempt to put the top down or
roll the rear or side curtains.
105
CAUTION!
• Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car wash. Window scratches and
wax build up may result.
• Do not lower the top when the temperature
is below 41°F (5°C). Damage to the top
may result.
• Do not move your vehicle until the top has
been either fully attached to the windshield
frame, or fully lowered.
• Do not lower the top with the windows
installed. Window and top damage may
occur.
• Refer to “Appearance Care for Fabric Top
Models” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for
further information. It contains important
information on cleaning and caring for your
vehicle’s fabric top.
• Do not use any tools (screwdrivers, etc.) to
pry or force any of the clamps, clips, or
retainers securing the soft top. Do not force
or pry the soft top framework when opening
or closing. Damage to the top may result.
WARNING!
• Do not drive the vehicle with the rear window curtain up unless the side curtains are
also removed. Dangerous exhaust gases
could enter the vehicle causing harm to the
driver and passengers.
• The fabric upper doors and fabric top are
designed only for protection against the
elements. Do not rely on them to contain
occupants within the vehicle or to protect
against injury during an accident. Remember, always wear seat belts.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause
interior water damage, stains or mildew on the
top material:
• It is recommended that the top be free of
water prior to opening it. Operating the top,
opening a door or lowering a window while
the top is wet may allow water to drip into
the vehicle’s interior.
(Continued)
106
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Careless handling and storage of the soft
top may damage the seals, causing water
to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
• The soft top must be positioned properly to
ensure sealing. Improper installation can
cause water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
Quick Steps to Lowering the Soft
Top
Refer to “Lowering the Soft Top” in this section
for further information.
1. Remove the side and back windows.
2. Release header latches from the windshield
frame.
NOTE:
Ensure fabric does not overhang the sides
of the vehicle.
3. Release the Sunrider姞 latch (both sides).
Quick Steps to Raising the Soft Top
Refer to “Raising the Soft Top” in this section for
further information.
1. Open the swing gate and raise the top,
engaging the Sunrider姞 latches (another person may be needed to help with this operation).
4. Open the swing gate and lower the top.
107
2. Engage header latches.
108
3. Install rear corner panels.
4. Install side and back windows.
Lowering The Soft Top
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Header Bow
2–Bow
3–Bow
Sail Panel
Body Side Retainer
6
7
8
9
—
—
—
—
Quarter Window
Check Strap
Front Retainer — Quarter Window
Bottom Retainer — Quarter Window
109
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
110
Zipper Start
Zipper Finish
Swing Gate Bar
Swing Gate Brackets
Sail Panels
• Unzip the rear window starting at the right
lower corner of the window. Pull the zipper up, across the top and down to the left
lower corner. Zipper pulls will stay on
the rear window. Pull down on the rear
window to disengage it from the zipper on
the top cover.
NOTE:
Clean side and rear windows before removal
to assist in preventing scratching during
removal of the soft top. If zippers are difficult
to operate due to road dust, etc., clean them
with a mild soap solution and a small brush.
Cleaning products are available through
your authorized dealer.
1. If your vehicle has half doors, remove each
half-door window by opening the door and
lifting the half-door window out.
NOTE:
Stow the half-door windows carefully outside of the vehicle, never inside, to avoid
scratches.
4. Open the swing gate.
5. Before unzipping the rear window, release the
first 3 in (7.6 cm) of both sail panels from the
channel. Remove the swing gate bar by pulling it
straight rearward out of the swing gate brackets.
2. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.
3. Release the header latches and leave the
hooks in the loops on the windshield.
111
6. Remove the rear window retainer from the
swing gate bracket on both the left and right
sides.
7. Stow the windows carefully to avoid scratching.
8. Undo the Velcro姞 that runs along the top and
rear edge of the side window.
9. Beginning from the rear lower corner, completely unzip the window.
112
10. Once unzipped, remove the side window
retainers from the door channel and body side
channel. Repeat this step on the opposite side.
NOTE:
When releasing the sail panel retainers, it is
helpful to pull down on the rear roof bow.
11. Finish releasing the sail panel retainers
from the body side channel at the rear corners
of the vehicle.
12. As you begin to lower the top, fold the sail
panels so that they rest on top of the soft top.
15. Make sure the plastic sleeves are slid
rearward over the Sunrider姞 link (Sunrider姞
Models only).
13. The swing gate brackets do not need to be
removed unless the hard top is being installed.
To remove the swing gate brackets, pull the
front of the bracket forward while rolling the
entire bracket back in toward the vehicle to
disengage.
14. Completely release the latches from the
loops on the windshield frame. If your vehicle
is not equipped with the Sunrider姞 package,
proceed to Step 15.
113
16. Unlatch the side bows from both door rails
(Sunrider姞 Models only).
19. Close the front header latches.
20. Remove the door frames, if desired. Refer
to “Door Frame” in this section for further information.
Raising the Soft Top
1. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.
2. Install door frames, if removed. Refer to
“Door Frame” in this section for further information.
17. Before lowering the top, open the swing
gate to prevent possible damage to the rear
center high-mounted brake light. Move to the
front of the vehicle. Grasp the side bow behind
the header and lift the top, folding it toward the
rear of the vehicle.
NOTE:
Help from another person will ease this
operation.
114
18. Tuck the fabric and the check straps between the bows and as far inward as possible.
This will keep any portion of the top from
flapping outside of the vehicle.
3. Make sure the plastic sleeve is slid over
Sunrider姞 link (Sunrider姞 Models only).
4. Standing on the side of the vehicle, lift the
top by the side bow and the 2–bow (middle
bow) up and over the sports bar until the
header rests on the top of the windshield frame.
7. If the swing gate brackets were removed,
install them by hooking the rear edge of the
bracket on the interior side of the body channel. Then, rotate it rearward and over the channel until it snaps onto the exterior part of the rail.
To be properly located, the bracket must only
be clipped to the shortened rail edge.
6. Open the header latches and engage the
hook on each side onto the windshield loops
(do not close the latches).
5. Make sure the Sunrider姞 bracket on the side
bows latches to the door rails (Sunrider姞 Models only).
115
8. Move to the rear of the vehicle and gently
pull the sail panels over the rear roof bow.
9. Partially install the sail panel retainers into
the body side channel, leaving the last 3 in
(7.6 cm) toward the rear window loose (on both
sides). Pulling down on the rear roof bow
(3–bow) will aid to reach the channel with the
retainers.
116
11. Insert the front retainer of the window into
the door channel, making sure the retainer is
fully seated and properly positioned on the
door frame. Failure to do so can result in wind
and water leaks or damage to the window.
10. To install the side windows, affix the window temporarily by attaching to the Velcro姞 in
the rear corner. Start the zipper but close only
about 1 in (2.5 cm).
13. Locate the black swing gate bar. Slide the
swing gate bar over the receiver at the bottom
inside of the rear window. The spongy part of
the seal should be down and pointed outward
to seal with the swing gate when closed.
1 — Incorrect Insertion
2 — Correct Insertion
12. Insert the retainer along the bottom edge of
the window into the bottom side channel, beginning at the front and working to the rear of
the vehicle. Finish by closing the zipper completely and attaching the Velcro姞 along the top
and rear of the window. Repeat this step for the
opposite side.
117
14. Install the rear window by starting both
zipper ends at the lower left corner of the rear
window opening. Ensure that the zippers are
properly started and aligned before zipping to
prevent damage.
15. Run the zipper fully around to the right side
of the window.
16. Grasp the swing gate bar and position it
into the swing gate brackets.
18. Apply downward pressure on the top corner of the rear soft top bow (3–bow), then
complete attaching the sail panel retainers into
the body side channel.
17. Insert the rear window retainer into the
swing gate bracket on both the left and right
sides.
118
19. Close the header latches and return the
sun visors to their secured position.
If the temperature is below 72°F (24°C) and/or
the top has been folded down for a period of
time, the top will appear to have shrunk when
you raise it, making it difficult to put up. This is
caused by a natural contraction of the vinyl
coating on the fabric top.
SOFT TOP (FOUR-DOOR MODELS)
Please visit the owner’s section of Jeep.com
for instructional videos.
CAUTION!
The soft top is not designed to carry any
additional loads such as roof racks, spare
tires, building, hunting, or camping supplies,
and/or luggage, etc. Also, it was not designed
as a structural member of the vehicle, and
thus cannot properly carry any additional
loads other than environmental (rain, snow,
etc.).
Place the vehicle in a warm area. Pull steadily
on the top fabric. The vinyl will stretch back to
its original size and the top can then be
snapped into place. If the temperature is 41°F
(5°C) or below, do not attempt to put the top
down or roll the rear or side curtains.
CAUTION!
• Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car wash. Window scratches and
wax buildup may result.
• Do not lower the top when the temperature
is below 41°F (5°C). Damage to the top
may result.
• Do not lower the top when the windows are
dirty. Grit may scratch the window.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not move your vehicle until the top has
been either fully attached to the windshield
frame, or fully lowered.
• Do not lower the top with the windows
installed. Window and top damage may
occur.
• Refer to “Appearance Care for Fabric Top
Models” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for
further information. It contains important
information on cleaning and caring for your
vehicle’s fabric top.
• Do not use any tools (screwdrivers, etc.) to
pry or force any of the clamps, clips, or
retainers securing the soft top. Do not force
or pry the soft top framework when opening
or closing. Damage to the top may result.
WARNING!
• Do not drive the vehicle with the rear window curtain up unless the side curtains are
also open. Dangerous exhaust gases
which can kill could enter the vehicle.
(Continued)
119
WARNING! (Continued)
• The fabric upper doors and fabric top are
designed only for protection against the
elements. Do not rely on them to contain
occupants within the vehicle or to protect
against injury during an accident. Remember, always wear seat belts.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause
interior water damage, stains or mildew on the
top material:
• It is recommended that the top be free of
water prior to opening it. Operating the top,
opening a door or lowering a window while
the top is wet may allow water to drip into
the vehicle’s interior.
• Careless handling and storage of the soft
top may damage the seals, causing water
to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The soft top must be positioned properly to
ensure sealing. Improper installation can
cause water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
NOTE:
Do not remove any of the three attachment
knobs unless you are planning on installing
the hard top.
2. Release header latches from the windshield
frame.
Quick Steps for Lowering the Soft
Top
1. Remove the side and back windows.
120
3. Fold header rearward, pulling the fabric to
the rear.
Quick Steps for Raising the Soft Top
1. Open the swing gate and raise the top,
engaging the Sunrider姞 latches (another person may be needed to help with this operation).
5. Open the swing gate and lower the top.
4. Release Sunrider姞 latch (both sides).
NOTE:
Ensure the fabric does not overhang the
sides of the vehicle.
121
2. Install rear corner panels.
5. Install the side and back windows.
4. Engage the header latches.
3. Rotate the header forward.
122
Folding Down The Soft Top
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Header Bow
2–Bow
3–Bow
4–Bow
Sail Panel
6 — Body Side Retainer
7 — Quarter Window
8 — Check Strap
9 — Front Retainer — Quarter Window
10 — Bottom Retainer — Quarter Window
123
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
124
Zipper Start
Zipper Finish
Swing Gate Bar
Swing Gate Brackets
Sail Panels
NOTE:
Clean side and rear windows before removal
to assist in preventing scratching during
removal of the soft top. If zippers are difficult
to operate due to road dust, etc., clean them
with a mild soap solution and a small brush.
Cleaning products are available through
your authorized dealer.
2. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.
4. Open the swing gate.
3. Release the header latches and hooks from
the loops on the windshield frame.
5. Before unzipping the rear window, release
the first 3 in (7.6 cm) of both sail panels from the
channel. Remove the swing gate bar by pulling
it straight rearward out of the swing gate brackets.
1. If your vehicle has half-doors, remove each
half-door window by opening the door and
lifting the half-door window out.
NOTE:
Stow half-door windows carefully outside of
the vehicle, never inside, to avoid scratches.
125
• Unzip the rear window starting at the right
lower corner of the window. Pull the zipper up, across the top and down to the left
lower corner. Zipper pulls will stay on
the rear window. Pull down on the rear
window to disengage it from the zipper on
the top cover.
7. Stow the windows carefully to avoid scratching.
8. Undo the Velcro姞 that runs along the top and
rear edge of the side window.
9. Beginning from the rear lower corner, completely unzip the window.
6. Remove the rear window retainer from the
swing gate bracket on both the left and right
sides.
126
10. Once unzipped, remove the side window
retainers from the door channel and body side
channel. Repeat this step on the opposite side.
11. Finish releasing the sail panel retainers
from the body side channel at the rear corners
of the vehicle.
NOTE:
When releasing the sail panel retainers, it is
helpful to pull down on the rear roof bow.
12. Fold the sail panels so that they rest on top
of the soft top.
13. The swing gate brackets do not need to be
removed unless the hard top is being installed.
To remove the swing gate brackets, pull the
front of the bracket forward while rolling the
entire bracket back in toward the vehicle to
disengage.
14. Grasp the front side bow behind the
header, and lift the top.
127
15. Fold back the front section of the top,
pulling the fabric rearward. Gently rest the
header on top of the rear portion of the deck.
16. Fold the top so that the material forms a
⬙W⬙ as shown. Enter the vehicle and move the
material into two folds.
18. Before lowering the top, open the swing
gate to prevent possible damage to the rear
center high-mounted brake light. Grasp the
folded side bows and slide the top along the
door frame track to the rear door frame.
17. Release the side bows by pressing down
on the latch above the front of the rear door.
Push the top rearward to disengage. Repeat
this step on the other side.
19. Gently slide the side bows off the door
frame track and lower the top down into the
vehicle.
NOTE:
Help from another person will ease this
operation.
128
2. Undo the straps used to secure the top in
the down position and store in secure location.
3. Open the swing gate.
4. Grasp the folded side bows and lift to the
top of the rear door frames.
NOTE:
Help from another person will ease this
operation.
20. Tuck the fabric and the check straps between the bows as far inside as possible. This
will keep any portion of the top from flapping
outside of the vehicle.
21. Once the top is fully down, use the Velcro姞
straps provided to secure the top to the vehicle
by wrapping the strap around the side bows
and through the slot on the body.
22. Close the front header latches.
23. Remove the door frames, if desired. Refer
to “Door Frame” in this section for further information.
Putting Up The Soft Top
NOTE:
Be extremely careful when putting up the
soft top to prevent the doors from getting
scratched. It may be helpful to open the rear
doors.
1. Install the door frames, if removed. Refer to
“Door Frame” in this section for further information.
129
5. Insert the slider feature of the knuckles into
the door frame tracks and slide the top forward.
9. Open the header latches and engage the
hook on each side onto the windshield loops
(do not close the latches).
7. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.
6. Ensure that the top locks into the Sunrider姞
locking mechanisms that are located above the
front of the rear doors.
130
8. Standing on the side of the vehicle, lift the
top by the side bow until it rests on the windshield frame.
10. If the swing gate brackets were removed,
install them by hooking the rear edge of the
bracket on the interior side of the body channel. Then, rotate it rearward and over the channel until it snaps onto the exterior part of the rail.
To be properly located, the bracket must only
be clipped to the shortened rail edge.
Partially install the sail panel retainers into the
body side channel, leaving the last 3 in (7.6 cm)
toward the rear window loose (on both sides).
Pulling down on the rear roof bow (4–bow) will
aid in reaching the channel with the retainers.
11. Ensure that the straps are positioned correctly before pulling the sail panels over the
rear roof bow (4–bow).
13. Insert the front retainer of the window into
the door channel, making sure the retainer is
fully seated and properly positioned on the
door frame. Failure to do so can result in wind
and water leaks or damage to the window.
12. To install the side windows, affix the window temporarily by attaching it to the Velcro姞 in
the upper rear corner. Start the zipper but close
only about 1 in (2.5 cm).
131
the seal should be down and pointed outward
to seal with the swing gate when closed.
1 — Incorrect Insertion
2 — Correct Insertion
16. Install the rear window by starting both
zipper ends at the lower left corner of the rear
window opening. Ensure that the zippers are
properly started and aligned before zipping to
prevent damage.
14. Insert the retainer along the bottom edge of
the window into the bottom side channel, beginning at the front and working to the rear of
the vehicle. Finish by closing the zipper completely and attaching the Velcro姞 along the top
and rear of the window. Repeat this step for the
opposite side.
15. Locate the black swing gate bar. Slide the
swing gate bar over the receiver at the bottom
inside of the rear window. The spongy part of
132
19. Insert the rear window retainer into the
swing gate bracket on both the left and right
sides.
17. Run the first zipper fully around to the right
side of the window.
18. Grasp the swing gate bar and position it
into the swing gate brackets.
SUNRIDER姞 (TWO-DOOR MODELS)
— IF EQUIPPED
20. Complete the installation of the sail panel
by inserting the rest of the retainer into the body
channel.
21. Close the header latches and return the
sun visors to their secured position.
CAUTION!
Operating the top, opening a door or lowering
a window while the top is wet may allow water
to drip into the vehicle’s interior.
NOTE:
If you are going to be driving faster than
40 mph (64 km/h) with the Sunrider姞 feature
open, it is recommended that you remove
the rear window of the vehicle.
133
Opening the Sunrider姞
1. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.
2. Release the header latches from the loops
on the windshield frame.
4. Grasp the header and lift the top back.
Make sure the material is folded back as
shown.
3. Slide the plastic sleeve forward.
5. Locate the straps to secure the side bows.
Wrap the straps around the bows as shown.
Repeat on the other side.
NOTE:
The Sunrider姞 latch on the door rail should
not be activated for Sunrider姞 use. If activated, the soft top must be reinstalled starting from the sail panels.
6. Reposition the sun visors.
134
Closing the Sunrider姞
Opening the Sunrider姞
1. Remove the straps from the side bows.
1. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.
2. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.
2. Release the header latches from the loops
on the windshield frame.
3. Grasp the front header and pull it to the front
of the vehicle.
4. Hook the header latches to the loops on the
windshield frame, close latches, and return the
sun visors to their original positions.
5. Slide the plastic sleeve rearward over the
Sunrider姞 link.
4. Fold back the front section of the top and
gently rest the header on top of the rear portion
of the deck.
SUNRIDER姞 (FOUR-DOOR MODELS)
— IF EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
Operating the top, opening a door or lowering
a window while the top is wet may allow water
to drip into the vehicle’s interior.
3. Grasp the front side bow behind the header,
and lift the top.
NOTE:
If you are going to be driving faster than
40 mph (64 km/h) with the Sunrider姞 feature
open, it is recommended that you remove
the rear window of the vehicle.
135
5. Fold the top so that the material forms a ⬙W⬙
as shown. Enter the vehicle and move the
material into two folds.
Do not drive your vehicle on-road with the
windshield down and the side bars removed as
you lose the protection these structural elements can provide.
Closing the Sunrider姞
Perform the above steps in the opposite order.
6. Secure the top by using the two provided
straps. Each strap will wrap around the side
bow and Velcro姞 to itself; use one strap on
each side of the vehicle.
NOTE:
Failure to fold the fabric rearward will allow
the material to sag and may block the rearview mirror.
FOLDING WINDSHIELD
The fold-down windshield and removable side
bars on your vehicle are structural elements
that can provide some protection in some accidents. The windshield also provides some
protection against weather, road debris and
intrusion of small branches and other objects.
136
If required for certain off-road uses, the side
bars can be removed and the windshield
folded down. However, the protection afforded
by these features is then lost. If you remove the
side bars and fold down the windshield, drive
slowly and cautiously. It is recommended that
the speed of the vehicle be limited to 10 mph
(16 km/h), with low range operation preferred if
you are driving off-road with the windshield
folded down.
Raise the windshield and reinstall the side bars
as soon as the task that required their removal
is completed and before you return to on-road
driving. Both you and your passenger should
wear seat belts at all times, on-road and offroad, regardless of whether the windshield is
raised or folded down.
Outside rearview mirrors are mounted on the
doors. If you choose to remove the doors, see
your authorized dealer for a replacement cowl-
mounted outside mirror. Federal law requires
outside mirrors on vehicles for on-road use.
WARNING!
Carefully follow these warnings to help protect
against personal injury:
• Do not drive your vehicle on-road with the
windshield down.
• Do not drive your vehicle unless the windshield is securely fastened, either up or
down.
• Eye protection, such as goggles, should be
worn at all times when the windshield is
down.
• Be sure that you carefully follow the instructions for raising the windshield. Make sure
that the folding windshield, windshield wipers, side bars, and all associated hardware
and fasteners are correctly and tightly assembled before driving your vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may prevent
your vehicle from providing you and your
passengers protection in some accidents.
WARNING! (Continued)
• If you remove the doors, store them outside
the vehicle. In the event of an accident, a
loose door may cause personal injury.
Lowering the Windshield and
Removing Side Bars
1. Lower the fabric top or remove the hard top
following the instructions in this manual.
NOTE:
To assist in properly reinstalling side bars,
mark the original locations prior to removing.
2. Remove the two top hex bolts (13 mm), and
the one side hex bolt (13 mm) visible through
the trim (Do not remove plastic corner trim, sun
visor bolts, or sport bar covering).
3. Remove the sun visor.
4. Remove the A-pillar cap.
5. Disconnect microphone (if equipped with
uconnect™ phone).
6. Open the sport bar Velcro covering.
7. Remove the one hex bolt (13 mm) visible
through the plastic trim on the bottom side of
the side bar, one hex bolt (13 mm) on the side
of the side bar, and one hex bolt (13 mm) on top
of the side bar.
(Continued)
137
NOTE:
Pull side bar out horizontally when removing.
9. To safely store the side bars in your vehicle,
use four cinch straps (available from your authorized dealer). Attach the straps through the
slots located on the floor behind the folded rear
seat at the front of the storage bin cover.
11. Remove the lower windshield plates by
removing the six black round-headed Torx姞
head screws (using a #40 Torx姞 head driver) on
each side of the base of the windshield.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you carry the
side bars loose in your vehicle. Remove the
side bars from the vehicle or securely store
them as described or they may cause personal injury if an accident occurs. See your
authorized dealer for the cinch straps.
CAUTION!
Do not remove the head impact foam from the
side bars, as damage to the foam may result.
NOTE:
Store all of the mounting bolts in their original threaded holes and tighten for safekeeping.
8. Remove the side bar assembly, and reattach the sport bar Velcro姞 covering.
138
10. Remove the windshield wiper arms by first
pulling the wiper away from the windshield and
out to the “lock” position. Unsnap the wiper arm
nut caps, and remove the retaining nuts. Lift the
wiper arms off and store them in the center
console or securely behind the rear seat.
NOTE:
It may be necessary to use a battery terminal
puller tool in order to separate the wiper
arms from the shaft after the nuts have been
removed.
12. Lower the windshield gently until it contacts the rubber hood bumpers.
13. Secure the windshield by passing a cinch
strap through the footman hoop on the center of
the hood and on the center of the windshield
frame. Tighten the strap to secure the windshield in place.
Raising the Windshield and
Replacing Side Bars
1. Raise the windshield.
2. Loosely attach the rear of the side bar to the
sport bar. Refer to Step 4 of “Lowering Windshield And Removing Side Bars” earlier in this
section.
• Reattach the sport bar Velcro姞 covering.
3. Attach the front of the side bar to the windshield frame.
• Install the top two hex bolts (13 mm) first,
then the lower side hex bolt (13 mm). The
lower side bolt will not align until the top
two bolts are installed.
4. Tighten all side bar attachment bolts.
5. Install the lower windshield plates with the
six black round-headed Torx姞 head screws
(using a #40 Torx姞 head driver) on each side of
the base of the windshield.
6. Reinstall the wiper arms.
139
REAR WINDOW FEATURES —
HARD TOP ONLY
Rear Window Wiper/Washer — If
Equipped
A rotary switch on the center portion of the
control lever (located on the right side of the
steering column) controls the operation of the
rear wiper/washer function.
Rotate the switch upward past the first
detent to activate the rear washer. The
washer pump and the wiper will continue to operate as long as the switch is
held. Upon release, the wiper will cycle two to
three times before returning to the set position.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is
turned to the LOCK position, the wiper will
automatically return to the “Park” position.
When the vehicle is restarted, the wiper will
resume function at whichever position the
switch is set at.
Rear Window Defroster — If
Equipped
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
Rotate the switch upward to the first
detent position for rear wiper operation.
140
The rear window defroster button is
located on the bottom right-side of the
blower control knob. Press this button
to turn on the rear window defroster. An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear
window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation, press the button a second
time.
NOTE:
To prevent excessive battery drain, use the
rear window defroster only when the engine
is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the
rear window. Do not use abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing
solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT
PANEL
• INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — GASOLINE . . . . . . . . . . .
• INSTRUMENT CLUSTER – DIESEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . .
• COMPASS AND TRIP COMPUTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Control Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Trip Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Compass/Temperature Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC) —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Displays
• Oil Change Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Compass Display / ECO (Fuel Saver Mode) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
143
144
145
146
154
154
155
155
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
158
159
160
160
. . 161
. . 162
141
• SOUND SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . .
• Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . . . . . . .
• CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Manual Heating and Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . .
• Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped
• Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
142
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
164
164
164
164
165
165
165
165
168
172
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1
2
3
4
5
6
— Air Outlet
— Instrument Cluster
— Radio
— Assist Handle
— Glove Compartment
— Power Window Switches
7 — Climate Controls
8 — Power Outlet
9 — Lower Switch Bank
10 — Power Mirror Switch — If Equipped
11 — Horn
143
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — GASOLINE
144
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER – DIESEL
145
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DESCRIPTIONS
1. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel
tank.
NOTE:
When the ignition switch is turned to OFF,
the fuel and temperature gauges may not
show accurate readings. When the engine is
not running, turn the ignition switch to ON/
RUN to obtain accurate readings.
2. Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. The light
should come on when the ignition
switch is first turned to ON/RUN and remain on
briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or
comes on while driving, turn off some of the
vehicle’s non-essential electrical devices or
increase engine speed (if at idle). If the charging system light remains on, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the
charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.
146
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump
Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
3. Front Fog Light Indicator
This indicator will illuminate when the
front fog lights are on.
4. Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2 U.S. Gallons (7.6L) this light will
come on and remain on until fuel is
added. The “Low Fuel Warning Light”
may turn on and off again, especially during
and after hard braking, accelerations, or turns.
This occurs due to the shifting of the fuel in the
tank.
5. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
6. Front Axle Lock Indicator — If Equipped
Indicates when the front axle lock
has been activated.
7. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned
to ON/RUN, this light will turn on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check.
During the bulb check, if the driver’s
seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After
the bulb check or when driving, if the driver
seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt
Warning Light will flash or remain on continuously. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
8. Turn Signal Indicators
The left or right arrow will flash with the
corresponding exterior turn signal lights
when the turn signal lever is operated. A
chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more
than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
9. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light shows low engine oil pressure. The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started, if the
bulb does not come on, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer. If the light
turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut
off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will
sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level
must be checked under the hood.
10. High Beam Indicator Light
This light shows that the high beam
headlights are on. Push the multifunction control lever away from you to
switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the
lever towards you to switch the headlights back
to low beam. If the driver’s door is open, and
the headlights or park lights are left on, the high
beam indicator light will remain illuminated and
a chime will sound.
11. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and
parking brake application. If the brake
light turns on, it may indicate that the parking
brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low,
or that there is a problem with the anti-lock
brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake
has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at
the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it
indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake
Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Program (ESP) system. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be
felt during each stop.
fluid level conditions. The vehicle should
have service performed, and the brake fluid
level checked.
The dual brake system provides a reserve
braking capacity in the event of a failure to a
portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either
half of the dual brake system is indicated by the
Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the
brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the
event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light.
Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
The light will remain on until the cause is
corrected.
Operation of the brake warning light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from the
OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light
should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during
sharp cornering maneuvers which change
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may
have failed. It will take longer to stop the
vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the
vehicle checked immediately.
147
parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch in the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake
is applied. It does not show the degree of
brake application.
13. Airbag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check
when the ignition switch is first
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is
either not on during starting, stays
on, or turns on while driving, then
have the system inspected at an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting
Your Vehicle” for further information.
12. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
After the ignition is turned on, the AntiLock Brake System (ABS) light illuminates to indicate function check at
vehicle start-up. If the light remains on after
start-up or comes on and stays on at road
speeds, it may indicate that the ABS has detected a malfunction or has become inoperative. The system reverts to standard non-antilock brakes.
14. Rear Axle Lock Indicator — If
Equipped
This light indicates when the rear
axle lock has been activated.
If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS
Warning Light are on, see an authorized dealer
immediately. Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System”
in “Starting And Operating”.
NOTE:
If equipped with a diesel engine and a
manual transmission the vehicle will be
equipped with a Start/Stop mode. When the
148
15. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in Revolutions Per
Minute (RPM).
engine is off while in Stop/Start mode, tachometer needle will be in green banded
zone of tachometer and the EVIC message
“Stop/Start Auto Stop Active” will display for
five seconds. For further information on the
Start/Stop system, refer to “Start/Stop System” in “Starting And Operating”.
CAUTION!
Do not operate the engine with the tachometer pointer in the red area. Engine damage
will occur.
16. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. If the engine is critically
hot, a warning chime will sound 10
times. After the chime turns off, the
engine will still be critically hot until the light
goes out.
17. Rear Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the
rear fog lights are on.
18. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for
approximately 15 seconds, when
the vehicle security alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly until
the vehicle is disarmed.
19. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant
temperature. Any reading within the normal
range indicates that the engine cooling system
is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather, up
mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It
should not be allowed to exceed the upper
limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge
reads “H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle
the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off
until the pointer drops back into the normal
range. If the pointer remains on the “H” and
you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine
off immediately, and call an authorized dealership for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.
You or others could be badly burned by steam
or boiling coolant. You may want to call an
authorized dealership for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under
the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
20. Cruise Indicator Light
This light shows when the electronic speed control system is
turned on.
21. 4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the
vehicle is in the four-wheel drive
mode, and the front and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same
speed.
22. Odometer / Trip Odometer / ECO (Fuel
Saver Indicator) Button
Press this button to change the display from
odometer to either of the two trip odometer
settings or the “ECO” display. Trip A or Trip B
will appear when in the trip odometer mode.
Press and hold the button for two seconds to
reset the trip odometer to 0 miles or kilometers.
The odometer must be in trip mode to reset.
23. Shift Lever Indicator
The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained
within the instrument cluster. It displays the
gear position of the automatic transmission.
149
24. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly, when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires
of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,
you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
150
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the tire
size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable
system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that
is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with
a TPMS, as damage to the sensors may
result.
25. Odometer / Trip Odometer Display
Area
The odometer shows the total distance the
vehicle has been driven. The trip odometer
shows individual trip mileage. Refer to “Odometer / Trip Odometer / ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) Button” for additional information.
Vehicle Odometer Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following odometer messages will display:
ECO . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Saver Indicator Off
ECO-ON . . . . . . . Fuel Saver Indicator On
door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door Ajar
gATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Liftgate Ajar
LoW tirE. . . . . . . . . . . Low Tire Pressure
HOTOIL . . . . Transmission Oil Temperature
Above Normal Limits
gASCAP . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Cap Fault
noFUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Fault
CHAngE OIL . . . . . . Oil Change Required
ESPOFF . . . . . . . . . . . ESP Deactivated
ECO / ECO-ON (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If
Equipped
The ECO-ON indicator will illuminate when you
are driving in a fuel efficient manner and can be
used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy. The ECO display will
toggle between ECO and ECO-ON depending
on driving habits and vehicle usage. Press the
Odometer / Trip Odometer / ECO (Fuel Saver
Indicator) button to change the display from
odometer to either of the two trip odometer
settings or the “ECO” display.
LoW tirE
When the appropriate condition exists, the
odometer display will toggle between LoW and
tirE for three cycles.
“HOTOIL” Transmission Temperature
Warning Message
The “HOTOIL” cluster message will appear in
the odometer accompanied with a chime to
indicate that there is excessive transmission
fluid temperature that might occur with severe
usage such as trailer towing. It may also occur
when operating the vehicle in a high torque
converter slip condition, such as 4-wheel drive
operation (e.g., snow plowing, off- road operation). If this “HOTOIL” message turns on, stop
the vehicle and run the engine at idle or faster,
with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the
message turns off.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature “HOTOIL” Warning message illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
WARNING!
If the Transmission Temperature “HOTOIL”
Warning message is illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle, in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to boil over,
come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire.
gASCAP
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines
that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
installed, or damaged, a “gASCAP” message
will display in the odometer display area.
Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press
the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the
message. If the problem continues, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is
started.
151
noFUSE
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines
that the Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse is improperly installed, or damaged, a “noFUSE” message will display in the odometer display area.
For further information on fuses and fuse locations refer to “Fuses” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
the oil change indicator system (after performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the
following procedure:
CHAngE OIL Message
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil
change indicator system. The “CHANgE OIL”
message will flash in the instrument cluster
odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a
single chime has sounded to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty-cycle based,
which means the engine oil change interval
may fluctuate dependent upon your personal
driving style.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK
position.
Unless reset, this message will continue to
display each time you turn the ignition switch to
the ON/RUN position. To turn off the message
temporarily, press and release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster. To reset
152
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position (Do not start the engine).
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal
slowly three times within 10 seconds.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when
you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If necessary repeat
this procedure.
26. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic
System called OBD II that monitors
engine and automatic transmission
control systems. The light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position
before engine start. If the bulb does not come
on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN,
have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions such as a loose or missing
gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc. may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should
be serviced if the light stays on through several
typical driving styles. In most situations, the
vehicle will drive normally and will not require
towing.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
damage to the engine control system. It also
could affect fuel economy and drivability. If the
MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter
damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced above, can reach higher temperatures
than in normal operating conditions. This can
cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over
flammable substances such as dry plants or
wood or cardboard, etc. This could result in
death or serious injury to the driver, occupants
or others.
27. Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
Indicator Light / Traction Control System
(TCS) Indicator Light
If the Electronic Stability Program
(ESP) / Traction Control System
(TCS) Indicator Light begins to
flash during acceleration, ease up
on the accelerator and apply as
little throttle as possible. This indicator light starts to flash as soon as the tires
lose traction and the Electronic Stability Program (ESP) becomes active. The ESP/TCS
Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active.
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road conditions. If the ESP/TCS Indi-
cator Light is on solid, the ESP system has
been turned off by the driver or a temporary
condition exists that will not allow full ESP
function.
28. O/D (Overdrive) Off Indicator Light
This light will illuminate when the O/D
OFF button has been selected and overdrive has been turned off. The O/D OFF
button is located on the center console.
29. Sway Bar Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This light will illuminate when the
front sway bar is disconnected.
30. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) is off.
31. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem
with the Electronic Throttle Control
(ETC) system. If a problem is detected while the engine is running,
the light will either stay on or flash
depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle
the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the shift lever is
placed in the PARK position. The light should
turn off. If the light remains on with the engine
running, your vehicle will usually be drivable;
however, see an authorized dealer for service
as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the engine is
running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an elevated / rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come
on when the ignition is first turned to ON/RUN
and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the
light does not come on during starting, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
153
32. Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) Display / Compass Mini-Trip
Computer Display — If Equipped
When the appropriate conditions exist, this
display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) messages. For further information, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center”.
When the appropriate conditions exist, this
display shows the Mini-Trip Computer messages. Refer to “Mini-Trip Computer” for further
information.
hicle. Refer to “Starting Procedures” in “Starting And Operating”.
COMPASS AND TRIP COMPUTER
The Compass/Trip Computer is located in the
instrument cluster. It features a driverinteractive display (displays information such
as outside temperature, compass direction,
and trip information).
154
Press and release the left button (on the instrument cluster) to access the computer displays.
Press and hold the left button (on the instrument cluster) for two to three seconds to switch
from English to Metric displays.
Reset / Change Display
Press and hold the left button (on the instrument cluster) while function is being displayed
to reset or change the display.
33. Water In Fuel Indicator Light — Diesel
Only
This light indicates water has collected in the fuel filter and should
be drained immediately. See an
authorized dealer for service.
34. Wait To Start Light — Diesel Only
This light will illuminate when the
ignition switch is first turned to the
ON position. Wait until the light
turns off before starting the ve-
and may need to be driven several minutes
before the updated temperature is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect
the displayed temperature, therefore temperature readings are not updated when the
vehicle is not moving.
The following trip displays can be reset or
changed:
Compass/Trip Computer
Control Buttons
NOTE:
The system will display the last known outside temperature when starting the vehicle
• AVG ECO
economy)
(changes
• ET (will reset display)
to
present
fuel
Trip Conditions
Average Fuel Economy (AVG ECO)
This display shows the average fuel economy
since the last reset.
Estimated Range (DTE)
This display shows the estimated distance that
can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the
tank. This estimated distance is based on the
most recent trip information: (Average Fuel
Economy) x (Fuel Remaining).
This display cannot be reset.
Elapsed Time (ET)
This display shows the accumulated ignition
ON time since the last reset.
Trip Odometer (ODO) / ECO (Fuel Saver
Indicator) — If Equipped
This display shows the distance traveled since
the last reset. Press and release the right button
(on the instrument cluster) to switch from odometer, to Trip A or Trip B, or to ECO. Press and
hold the right button while the odometer/trip
odometer is displayed to reset.
Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A
since the last reset.
Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B
since the last reset.
ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If Equipped
The ECO-ON indicator will illuminate when you
are driving in a fuel efficient manner and can be
used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy. The ECO display will
toggle between ECO and ECO-ON depending
on driving habits and vehicle usage.
Compass/Temperature Display
NOTE:
If the vehicle is equipped with a Chrysler
Uconnect™ gps (Navigation Radio), the NAV
system will provide the compass direction,
and the variance and calibration menus will
be unavailable. The compass will perform
accurately, based on GPS signals instead of
the Earth’s magnetic field.
This display provides the outside temperature
and one of eight compass readings to indicate
the direction the vehicle is facing.
WARNING!
Even if the display still reads a few degrees
above 32°F ( 0°C), the road surface may be
icy, particularly in woods or on bridges. Drive
carefully under such conditions to prevent an
accident and possible personal injury or property damage.
Automatic Compass Calibration
The self-calibrating feature of the compass
eliminates the need to calibrate the compass
for normal conditions. During a short initial
period, the compass may appear erratic and
the CAL symbol will appear (blinking) on the
display. After the vehicle has completed at
least one complete circle under 5 mph (8 km/h)
in an area free from large metal objects, calibration will be complete when the CAL indicator turns off.
After initial calibration, the compass will continue to automatically update this calibration
whenever the vehicle is in motion.
155
NOTE:
• A good calibration requires a level surface
and an environment free from large metallic
objects such as buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks, etc.
• Magnetic and battery powered devices,
(such as cell phones, iPod’s, radar detectors, PDA’s and laptops) should be kept
away from the top of the instrument
panel. This is where the compass module
is located and such devices may interfere
and cause false compass readings.
Manual Compass Calibration
NOTE:
Before attempting a manual compass calibration, the engine must be running and the
transmission in the PARK position (if
equipped).
If the compass appears erratic or inaccurate
and the variance has been properly set, you
may wish to manually recalibrate the compass.
To manually calibrate the compass:
1. First enter the variance mode. Press and hold
the left button (located on the instrument cluster)
156
for approximately 10 seconds to enter the variance mode, and release the button when the VAR
(Compass Variance) symbol appears.
2. The current variance value will also be displayed. Once in the variance mode, it is necessary to release the button, and then press
and hold it again (approximately 10 seconds)
until CAL is displayed (solid, not blinking).
3. Manual compass calibration has been initiated. Drive the vehicle slowly in one or more
circles under 5 mph (8 km/h) in an area free
from large metal objects until the CAL indicator
turns off.
When the CAL symbol is no longer displayed, the
compass is calibrated and should display correct
headings. Verify proper calibration by checking
North (N), South (S), East (E), and West (W). If the
compass does not appear accurate, repeat the
calibration procedure in another area.
Compass Variance (VAR)
Compass Variance is the difference between
Magnetic North and Geographic North. To ensure compass accuracy, the compass variance
should be properly set according to the variance map for the zone where the vehicle will be
driven. When properly set, the compass will
automatically account for this difference.
Setting The Compass Variance
Refer to the variance map for the correct compass variance zone. To check the variance
zone, the ignition must be ON. Press and hold
the left button (located on the instrument cluster) for approximately 10 seconds to enter the
variance mode and release the button when the
VAR symbol appears. The current variance
value will also be displayed. To change the
zone, press the left button once to increment
the zone. The default is Zone 8. After Zone 15,
the values will wrap around to Zone 1. When the
correct zone is displayed (per the Compass
Variance Zone Map) for the zone that the
vehicle is located in, wait for about ten seconds; then the trip computer will store the
variance value in memory and the compass will
resume normal operation.
NOTE:
The U.S./Metric display will change from
English to Metric or Metric to English before
the VAR symbol appears, however, it will
revert back to its original setting after programming the compass functions.
Compass Variance Map
157
Outside Temperature
If the outside temperature is more than 131°F
(55°C), the display will show 131°F (55°C).
When the outside temperature is less than
⫺40°F (⫺40°C), the display will show ⫺40°F
(⫺40°C).
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE
INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC) — IF
EQUIPPED
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that
is located in the instrument cluster.
This system conveniently allows the driver to
select a variety of useful information by pressing the switches mounted on the steering
wheel. The EVIC consists of the following:
• System Status
• Vehicle information warning message displays
• Tire Pressure Monitor System (if equipped)
• Stop/Start System Status (if equipped)
• Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)
• Compass display
• Outside temperature display
• Trip computer functions
• Uconnect™
equipped)
gps
system
screens
(if
• Audio mode display
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
158
The system allows the driver to select information by pressing the following buttons mounted
on the steering wheel:
EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons
MENU Button
Press and release the MENU button to scroll through the main
menus (Fuel Economy, Warnings,
Timer, Units, System, Personal Settings) or to exit sub menus.
COMPASS Button
Press and release the COMPASS
button to display one of eight compass readings and the outside
temperature or to exit sub menus
SELECT Button
Press and release the SELECT
button for access to main menus,
sub menus or to select a personal
setting in the setup menu.
• Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a
single chime)
• Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is
in motion)
• RKE Battery Low (with a single chime)
• Liftgate Ajar (with a single chime)
• Memory #1/#2 Profile Set
• Check Gascap (refer to “Adding Fuel” in
“Starting And Operating” for more details)
• Memory #1/#2 Profile Recall
DOWN Button
Press and release the DOWN button to scroll downward through the
sub menus.
Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) Displays
• Memory System Disabled – Vehicle Not in
Park (with a single chime) — Automatic
Transmission
• Service Park Assist System (with a single
chime)
• Memory System Disabled – Vehicle in Motion
(with a single chime) — Manual Transmission
• ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If Equipped
• Memory System Disabled – Seat Belt Buckled (with a single chime)
When the appropriate conditions exist, the
EVIC displays the following messages.
• Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle Not
in Park — Automatic Transmission
• Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning
chime)
• Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle in
Motion — Manual Transmission
• Left Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single
chime)
• Left/Right Front Door Ajar (one or more, with
a single chime if speed is above 1 mph
(1.6 km/h))
• Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single
chime)
• Right Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a
single chime)
• Left/Right Rear Door Ajar (one or more, with
a single chime if speed is above 1 mph
(1.6 km/h))
• Oil Change Required (with a single chime)
• Stop/Start Not Ready — Diesel Manual
Transmission Only (refer to “Stop/Start System” in “Starting And Operating” for more
details)
• Stop/Start Ready — Diesel Manual Transmission Only (refer to “Stop/Start System” in
“Starting And Operating” for more details)
• Stop/Start Auto Stop Active — Diesel Manual
Transmission Only (refer to “Stop/Start System” in “Starting And Operating” for more
details)
159
• Stop/Start Key Start Required — Diesel
Manual Transmission Only (refer to “Stop/
Start System” in “Starting And Operating” for
more details)
• Service Stop/Start System — Diesel Manual
Transmission Only (refer to “Stop/Start System” in “Starting And Operating” for more
details)
• Stop/Start System Page — Diesel Manual
Transmission Only (refer to “Stop/Start System” in “Starting And Operating” for more
details)
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil
change indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message will flash in the EVIC display
for approximately 10 seconds after a single
chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which
means the engine oil change interval may
fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to
display each time you turn the ignition switch to
160
the ON position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and release the MENU button. To
reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance) perform the following procedure:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
Do not start the engine.
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly
three times within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when
you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If necessary, repeat
this procedure.
Trip Functions
Press and release the MENU button until one of
the following Trip Functions displays in the
EVIC:
• Average Fuel Economy
• Distance To Empty
• Elapsed Time
• Display Units of Measure in
Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all
the Trip Computer functions.
The Trip Functions mode displays the following
information:
• Average Fuel Economy
Shows the average fuel economy since the last
reset. When the fuel economy is reset, the
display will read “RESET” or show dashes for
two seconds. Then, the history information will
be erased, and the averaging will continue from
the last fuel average reading before the reset.
• Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be
traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank. This
estimated distance is determined by a
weighted average of the instantaneous and
average fuel economy, according to the current
fuel tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the
FUNCTION SELECT button.
NOTE:
Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual
drivable distance of the vehicle, regardless
of the DTE displayed value.
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles
(48 km) estimated driving distance, the DTE
display will change to a text display of ⬙LOW
FUEL.⬙ This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant
amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the
⬙LOW FUEL⬙ text and a new DTE value will
display.
• Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the
last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC
position. Elapsed time will increment when the
ignition switch is in the ON or START position.
• Display Units of Measure in:
To make your selection, press and release the
FUNCTION SELECT button until “ENGLISH” or
“METRIC” appears.
To Reset The Display
Reset will only occur while a resettable function
is being displayed. Press and release the
FUNCTION SELECT button once to clear the
resettable function being displayed. To reset all
resettable functions, press and release the
FUNCTION SELECT button a second time
within three seconds of resetting the currently
displayed function (reset ALL will display during this three-second window).
Compass Display / ECO (Fuel Saver
Mode) — If Equipped
The compass readings indicate the direction
the vehicle is facing. Press and release the
COMPASS button to display one of eight compass readings and the outside temperature.
NOTE:
The system will display the last known outside temperature when starting the vehicle
and may need to be driven several minutes
before the updated temperature is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect
the displayed temperature, therefore temperature readings are not updated when the
vehicle is not moving.
ECO (Fuel Saver Mode) — If Equipped
The ECO message will display below the outside temperature in the EVIC display. This
message will appear whenever you are driving
in a fuel efficient manner.
This feature allows you to monitor when you are
driving in a fuel efficient manner, and it can be
used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to set the compass manually.
When the vehicle is new, the compass may
appear erratic and the EVIC will display “CAL”
until the compass is calibrated. You may also
calibrate the compass by completing one or
more 360–degree turns (in an area free from
large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL”
message displayed in the EVIC turns off. The
compass will now function normally.
NOTE:
A good calibration requires a level surface
and an environment free from large metallic
objects such as buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks, etc.
161
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic and the “CAL”
indicator does not appear in the EVIC display,
you must put the compass into the Calibration
Mode manually as follows:
should be set for the zone where the vehicle is
driven, per the zone map. Once properly set,
the compass will automatically compensate for
the differences and provide the most accurate
compass heading.
1. Start the engine. Leave the shift lever in
PARK in order to enter the EVIC Programming
Menus.
NOTE:
Magnetic materials should be kept away
from the top of the instrument panel, this is
where the compass sensor is located.
2. Press the MENU button until the Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
menu displays in the EVIC.
4. Press and release the SELECT button to
start the calibration. The “CAL” indicator will
display in the EVIC.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between
Magnetic North and Geographic North. To
compensate for the differences, the variance
162
4. Press and release SELECT button until the
proper variance zone is selected according to
the map.
5. Press and release the COMPASS button to
exit.
Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and
recall features when the vehicle speed is at
0 mph (0 km/h) (manual transmission) or when
the shift lever is in PARK (auto transmission).
3. Press the DOWN button until “Calibrate
Compass” displays in the EVIC.
5. Complete one or more 360–degree turns (in
an area free from large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL” indicator turns off. The
compass will now function normally.
3. Press the DOWN button until “Compass
Variance” message and the last variance zone
number displays in the EVIC.
Press and release the MENU button until Personal Settings displays in the EVIC.
Use the DOWN button to display one of the
following choices:
Compass Variance Map
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Press and hold the COMPASS button for
approximately two seconds.
Language
When in this display you may select one of five
languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system
(if equipped). Press the SELECT button while in
this display to select English, Espanol or Fran-
cais. Then, as you continue, the information will
display in the selected language.
Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph
(24 km/h)
When on is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of
15 mph (24 km/h). To make your selection,
press and release the SELECT button until “On”
or “Off” appears.
Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit
When ON is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is
in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the
driver’s door is opened. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until
“On” or “Off” appears.
Remote Key Unlock
When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only
the driver’s door will unlock on the first press of
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
UNLOCK button. When Driver Door 1st Press is
selected, you must press the RKE transmitter
UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. When All Doors 1st Press is
selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first
press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.
To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until “Driver Door 1st Press” or
“All Doors 1st Press” appears.
Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock
When on is selected, the front and rear turn
signals will flash when the doors are locked or
unlocked with the RKE transmitter. This feature
may be selected with or without the sound horn
on lock feature selected. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until
“On” or “Off” appears.
Delay Turning Headlights Off
When this feature is selected, the driver can
choose to have the headlights remain on for 0,
30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle.
To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until “0,” “30,” “60,” or “90”
appears.
Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit
When this feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, hands–free system (if
equipped), DVD video system (if equipped),
power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets
will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position.
Opening either front vehicle door will cancel
this feature. To make your selection, press and
release the SELECT button until “Off,”
“45 sec.,” “5 min.,” or “10 min.” appears.
Illumination Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights
will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE
transmitter. To make your selection, press and
hold the SELECT button until “Off,” “30 sec,”
“60 sec,” or “90 sec” appears.
Nav–Turn By Turn
When this feature is selected, the navigation
system utilizes voice commands, guiding
through the drive route, mile by mile, turn-byturn until the final destination is reached. To
make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears
next to the feature showing the system has
been activated or the check-mark is removed,
showing the system has been deactivated.
Hill Start Assist (HSA) — If Equipped
When on is selected, the HSA system is active.
Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System” in
163
the left-hand control is different depending on
which mode you are in.
“Starting And Operating” for system function
and operating information. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until
“On” or “Off” appears.
The following describes the left-hand control
operation in each mode.
Display Fuel Saver — If Equipped
The “ECO” message is located in the
Compass/Temperature display, this message
can be turned on or off. To make your selection,
press and release the SELECT button until
“ON” or “OFF” appears.
Compass Variance
Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
Calibrate Compass
Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
SOUND SYSTEMS
Refer to your Sound Systems Booklet.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO
CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located
on the rear surface of the steering wheel.
Reach behind the wheel to access the
switches.
164
Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for
the next listenable station and pressing the
bottom of the switch will “Seek” down for the
next listenable station.
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of
Steering Wheel)
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch
with a pushbutton in the center and controls the
volume and mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase the
volume, and pressing the bottom of the rocker
switch will decrease the volume.
Pressing the center button will make the radio
switch between the various modes available
(AM/FM/SAT/CD/HDD/AUX/VES, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch
with a pushbutton in the center. The function of
The button located in the center of the left-hand
control will tune to the next preset station that
you have programmed in the radio preset
pushbutton.
CD Player
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to
the next track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of
the switch once will go to the beginning of the
current track, or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the
current track begins to play.
If you press the switch up or down twice, it
plays the second track; three times, it will play
the third, etc.
The center button on the left side rocker switch
has no function for a single-disc CD player.
However, when a multiple-disc CD player is
equipped on the vehicle, the center button will
select the next available CD in the player.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the
following precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching
the surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with
a soft cloth, wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid
scratching the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures
may become too high.
NOTE:
If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc, it may be damaged (i.e.,
scratched, reflective coating removed, a
hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized,
or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player
service.
Manual Heating and Air Conditioning
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE
PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone
being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or
noisy performance from your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not satisfactorily “clear” by the
repositioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down
or off during mobile phone operation.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Air Conditioning and Heating System is
designed to make you comfortable in all types
of weather.
The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a
series of outer rotary dials and inner push
knobs.
Blower Control
Rotate this control to
regulate the amount of
air forced through the
ventilation system in
any mode. The blower
speed increases as you
move the control to the
right from the “O” (OFF)
position. There are
seven blower speeds.
165
Temperature Control
Mode Control (Air Direction)
Rotate this control to
regulate the temperature of the air inside the
passenger
compartment. Rotating the dial
left into the blue area of
the scale indicates
cooler
temperatures
while rotating right into
the red area indicates
warmer temperatures.
NOTE:
If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the
A/C condenser located in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or insects.
Clean with a gentle water spray from behind
the radiator and through the condenser.
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce
airflow to the condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
166
Rotate this control to
choose from several
patterns of air distribution. You can select either a primary mode as
identified by the symbols on the control, or a
blend of two of these
modes. The closer the
setting is to a particular
symbol, the more air distribution you receive
from that mode.
Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the
instrument panel. These outlets can be
adjusted to direct airflow.
NOTE:
The center instrument panel outlets can be
aimed so that they are directed toward the
rear seat passengers for maximum airflow
to the rear.
Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and
floor outlets.
NOTE:
For all settings except full cold or full hot,
there is a difference in temperature between
the upper and lower outlets. The warmer air
flows to the floor outlets. This feature gives
improved comfort during sunny but cool
conditions.
Floor
Air is directed through the floor outlets
with a small amount flowing through the
defrost and side window demist outlets.
Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost,
and side window demist outlets. This
setting works best in cold or snowy
conditions that require extra heat to the
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Defrost
Air is directed through the windshield
and side window demist outlets. Use
this mode with maximum blower and
temperature settings for best windshield and
side window defrosting.
NOTE:
The air conditioning compressor operates in
Mix, Defrost, or a blend of these modes,
even if the Air Conditioning (A/C) button is
not pressed. This dehumidifies the air to
help dry the windshield. To improve fuel
economy, use these modes only when necessary.
Recirculation Control
Pressing the Recirculation Control
button will put the system in recirculation mode. This can be used
when outside conditions such as
smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the control button to
illuminate. After ten minutes, the system will
return to normal mode function and the LED will
turn off.
NOTE:
• Continuous use of the recirculation mode
may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of
this mode is not recommended.
• The use of the recirculation mode in cold
or damp weather will cause windows to
fog on the inside, because of moisture
buildup inside the vehicle. Select the Outside Air position for maximum defogging.
• The A/C will engage automatically to prevent fogging when the recirculation button is pressed and the mode control is set
to panel or panel / floor.
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
• When the ignition switch is turned to the
LOCK position, the recirculation feature
will be cancelled.
Air Conditioning Control
Press this button to engage the Air Conditioning. A light will illuminate when the Air
Conditioning System is
engaged. Rotating the
dial left into the blue
area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while rotating right
into the red area indicates warmer temperatures.
NOTE:
The air conditioning compressor will not
engage until the engine has been running
for about 10 seconds.
• MAX A/C
For maximum cooling turn on the A/C and
recirculation buttons at the same time.
• ECONOMY MODE
If economy mode is desired, press the A/C
button to turn OFF the indicator light and the
A/C compressor. Then, move the temperature
control to the desired temperature.
167
Automatic Temperature Control
(ATC) — If Equipped
Automatic Temperature Control
Automatic Operation
The Automatic Temperature Control system automatically maintains the climate in the cabin of
the vehicle at the comfort levels desired by the
driver and passenger.
Operation of the system is quite simple.
1. Turn the Mode Control knob (on the right)
and the Blower Control knob (on the left) to
AUTO.
168
NOTE:
The AUTO position performs best for front
seat occupants only.
2. Dial in the temperature you would like the
system to maintain by
rotating the Temperature Control knob. Once
the comfort level is selected, the system will
maintain that level automatically using the
heating system. Should
the desired comfort level require air conditioning, the system will automatically make the
adjustment.
You will experience the greatest efficiency by
simply allowing the system to function automatically. Selecting the “O” (OFF) position on
the blower control stops the system completely
and closes the outside air intake.
The recommended setting for maximum comfort is 72°F (22°C) for the average person;
however, this may vary.
NOTE:
• The temperature setting can be adjusted
at anytime without affecting automatic
operation.
• Pressing the Air Conditioning Control
button while in AUTO mode will cause the
LED in the control button to flash three
times and then turn off. This indicates
that the system is in AUTO mode and
requesting the air conditioning is not necessary.
• If your air conditioning performance
seems lower than expected, check the
front of the A/C condenser located in front
of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt
or insects. Clean with a gentle water
spray from behind the radiator and
through the condenser. Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
Blower Control
For full automatic operation or for automatic
blower operation turn
the knob to AUTO position. In manual mode
there are seven blower
speeds that can be individual selected. In off
position the blower will
shut off.
Manual Operation
This system offers a full complement of manual
override features, which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic, Mode Preferred Automatic, or
Blower and Mode Preferred Automatic. This
means the operator can override the blower,
the mode, or both. There is a manual blower
range for times when the AUTO setting is not
desired. The blower can be set to any fixed
blower speed by rotating the Blower Control
knob (on the left).
NOTE:
Please read the Automatic Temperature
Control Operation Chart that follows for details.
169
170
The operator can override the AUTO mode
setting to change airflow distribution by rotating
the Mode Control knob (on the right) to one of
the following positions.
• Floor
Air is directed through the floor outlets
with a small amount flowing through the
defrost and side window demist outlets.
• Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the
instrument panel. These outlets can be
adjusted to direct airflow.
• Mix
NOTE:
The center instrument panel outlets can be
aimed so that they are directed toward the
rear seat passengers for maximum airflow
to the rear.
• Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and
floor outlets.
NOTE:
For all settings except full cold or full hot,
there is a difference in temperature between
the upper and lower outlets. The warmer air
flows to the floor outlets. This feature gives
improved comfort during sunny but cool
conditions.
Air is directed through the floor, defrost,
and side window demist outlets. This
setting works best in cold or snowy
conditions that require extra heat to the
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
• Defrost
Air is directed through the windshield
and side window demist outlets. Use
this mode with maximum blower and
temperature settings for best windshield and
side window defrosting.
• Air Conditioner Control
Press this button to turn
on the air conditioning
during manual operation only. When the air
conditioning is turned
on, cool dehumidified
air will flow through the
outlets selected with the
Mode control dial. Press
this button a second
time to turn OFF the air conditioning. An LED in
the button illuminates when manual compressor operation is selected.
• Recirculation Control
The system will automatically control recirculation. However, pressing the Recirculation Control button will temporarily put the system
in recirculation mode (ten minutes). This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or
high humidity are present. Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the control button to
171
illuminate. After ten minutes, the system will
return to normal AUTO mode function and the
LED will turn off.
NOTE:
• When the ignition switch is turned to the
LOCK position, the recirculation feature
will be cancelled.
• In cold weather, use of the Recirculation
mode may lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation mode is not allowed in the floor, defrost, or defrost/floor
mode in order to improve window clearing. Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these modes are selected.
• Extended use of recirculation may cause
the windows to fog. If the interior of the
windows begins to fog, press the Recirculation button to return to outside air.
Some temp/humidity conditions will
cause captured interior air to condense
on windows and hamper visibility. For
this reason, the system will not allow
Recirculation to be selected while in floor,
defrost, or defrost/floor mode. Attempting
to use the recirculation while in these
172
modes will cause the LED in the control
button to blink and then turn off.
• Most of the time, when in Automatic Operation, you can temporarily put the system into Recirculation Mode by pressing
the Recirculation button. However, under
certain conditions, while in Automatic
Mode, the system is blowing air out the
defrost vents. When these conditions are
present, and the Recirculation button is
pressed, the indicator will flash and then
turn off. This tells you that you are unable
to go into Recirculation Mode at this time.
If you would like the system to go into
Recirculation Mode, you must first move
the Mode knob to Panel, Panel/Floor and
then press the Recirculation button. This
feature reduces the possibility of window
fogging.
Operating Tips
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the end of this section
for suggested control settings for various
weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system in air-conditioned
vehicles must be protected with a high-quality
antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
protection and to protect against engine overheating. A solution of 50% ethylene glycol
antifreeze coolant and 50% water is recommended. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper coolant
selection.
Winter Operation
Use of the air Recirculation Mode during winter
months is not recommended because it may
cause window fogging.
Vacation Storage
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,
run the air conditioning system at idle for about
five minutes in the fresh air and high blower
settings. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be
quickly removed by turning the mode selector
to Defrost. The Defrost/Floor mode can be used
to maintain a clear windshield and provide
sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes a problem, increase blower speed. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild
but rainy or humid weather.
NOTE:
Recirculate without A/C should not be used
for long periods as fogging may occur.
Side Window Demisters
A side window demister outlet is located at
each end of the instrument panel. These nonadjustable outlets direct air toward the side
windows when the system is in the FLOOR,
MIX, or DEFROST mode. The air is directed at
the area of the windows through which you view
the outside mirrors.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front
of the windshield, is free of obstructions such
as leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake
may reduce airflow, and if they enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In winter
months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter — If Equipped
The A/C Filter prevents most dust and pollen
from entering the cabin. The filter acts on air
coming from outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the passenger compartment.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for A/C Air Filter service
information or see your authorized dealer for
service. Refer to “Maintenance Schedules” for
filter service intervals.
173
Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions
174
5
STARTING AND OPERATING
• STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Manual Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Automatic Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .
• Normal Starting – Gasoline Engine . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Extreme Cold Weather (below –20°F or –29°C) . . . . . .
• If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Normal Starting – Diesel Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• STOP/START SYSTEM — DIESEL MODELS WITH MANUAL
TRANSMISSION ONLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Automatic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .
• Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Reverse Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
180
180
180
180
180
181
181
182
.
.
.
.
.
.
183
183
185
186
187
187
175
• AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .
• Key Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Brake/Transmission Interlock System . . . . . . . . . . .
• Four-Speed Automatic Transmission With Overdrive
(3.8L Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Five–Speed Automatic Transmission
(2.8L Diesel Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION (COMMAND-TRAC I姞 OR
ROCK-TRAC姞) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Operating Instructions/Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Shift Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Shifting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• TRAC-LOK姞 REAR AXLE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .
• AXLE LOCK (TRU–LOK姞) — RUBICON MODELS . . . . . .
• ELECTRONIC SWAY BAR DISCONNECT — IF EQUIPPED .
• ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Side Step Removal – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• The Basics Of Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• When To Use 4L (Low) Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Operation . . . . . . .
176
. 187
. 188
. 188
. 188
. 191
. 191
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
194
194
195
195
196
196
197
198
198
198
199
199
199
• Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other High Points) . . .
• Hill Climbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• After Driving Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . .
• Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and ESC OFF
Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Hill Descent Control (HDC) – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .
• TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
199
200
202
203
205
205
206
206
207
208
209
209
209
211
212
215
215
216
217
217
217
177
• Tire Pressures For High-Speed Operation .
• Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .
• TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .
• Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• FUEL REQUIREMENTS — GASOLINE ENGINES
• Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• MMT in Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Materials Added to Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . .
• FUEL REQUIREMENTS — DIESEL ENGINES . .
• ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Locking Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . .
• TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . .
• Breakaway Cable Attachment . . . . . . . . .
178
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
218
218
219
219
219
219
220
221
222
224
224
224
225
225
225
226
226
226
227
227
228
• Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Trailer Hitch Attaching Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC)
• Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . . . . .
• Recreational Towing – Four-Wheel Drive Models . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
230
230
230
232
233
234
234
234
179
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and
fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build up may cause serious injury or
death.
• Never leave children in the vehicle alone.
Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is
dangerous for a number of reasons. The
child or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. The child could operate power windows, other controls or move the vehicle.
Manual Transmission – If Equipped
Apply the parking brake, place the shift lever in
NEUTRAL and press the clutch pedal before
starting the vehicle. This vehicle is equipped
with a clutch interlocking ignition system. It will
not start unless the clutch pedal is pressed to
the floor.
180
4WD Models Only
In 4L mode, this vehicle will start regardless of
whether or not the clutch pedal is pressed to
the floor. This feature enhances off-road performance by allowing the vehicle to start when in
4L without having to press the clutch pedal.
The “4WD Indicator Light” will illuminate when
the transfer case has been shifted into this
mode.
Automatic Transmission – If
Equipped
Start the engine with the shift lever in the
NEUTRAL or PARK position. Apply the brake
before shifting to any driving range.
Normal Starting – Gasoline Engine
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or
pressing the accelerator pedal.
Turn the ignition switch to the START position
and release when the engine starts. If the
engine fails to start within 10 seconds, turn the
ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to
15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
Tip Start Feature – Automatic Transmission
Only
Turn the ignition switch to the START position
and release it as soon as the starter engages.
The starter motor will continue to run, but will
automatically disengage itself when the engine
is running. If the engine fails to start, the starter
will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. If
this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.
Extreme Cold Weather (below –20°F
or –29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an externally powered electric
engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids
into the throttle body air inlet opening in an
attempt to start the vehicle. This could
result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle
to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission cannot be started
this way. Unburned fuel could enter the
catalytic converter and, once the engine
has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a
discharged battery, booster cables may be
used to obtain a start from a booster battery
or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump Starting” in “What to
Do In Emergencies” for further information.
Without Tip Start (Manual Transmission
Only)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold
Weather” procedures, it may be flooded. Push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor
and hold it there while cranking the engine. This
should clear any excess fuel in case the engine
is flooded.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank
the engine for more than 15 seconds at a
time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying
again.
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to
run, but not have enough power to continue
running when the key is released. If this occurs,
continue cranking with the accelerator pedal
pushed all the way to the floor. Release the
accelerator pedal and the key once the engine
is running smoothly.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two
15–second periods of cranking with the accel-
erator pedal held to the floor, repeat the “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” procedures.
With Tip Start (Automatic Transmission
Only)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold
Weather” procedures, it may be flooded. To
clear any excess fuel, push the accelerator
pedal all the way to the floor and hold it. Then,
turn the ignition switch to the START position
and release it as soon as the starter engages.
The starter motor will disengage automatically
in 10 seconds. Once this occurs, release the
accelerator pedal, turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then
repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed will automatically decrease as
the engine warms up.
181
Normal Starting – Diesel Engine
1. The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or
PARK position before you can start the engine.
2. Turn the ignition key to the ON position.
3. Watch for the “Wait To Start Light” in the
instrument cluster. Refer to “Instrument Cluster”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further review. It will glow for two to ten seconds
or more, depending on engine temperature.
When the “Wait To Start Light” goes out, the
engine is ready to start.
4. Tip Start Feature (Automatic
Transmission Only)
Do not press the accelerator. Turn the ignition
key to the START position and then release it.
The starter motor will continue to run, and it will
automatically disengage when the engine is
running. If the engine fails to start, the starter
will disengage automatically in 20 seconds. If
this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
position, wait 25 to 30 seconds, then repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.
182
NOTE:
The starter motor may run up to 30 seconds
in very cold conditions until the engine is
started. The starter can be disengaged by
turning the ignition key to the OFF position,
if required.
5. Without Tip Start Feature (Manual
Transmission Only)
Turn the ignition switch to the START position
and release when the engine starts. If the
engine fails to start within 10 seconds, turn the
ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to
15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
6. After the engine starts, allow it to idle for
approximately 30 seconds before driving. This
allows oil to circulate and lubricate the turbocharger.
Engine Warm-Up
Avoid full throttle operation when the engine is
cold. When starting a cold engine, bring the
engine up to operating speed slowly to allow
the oil pressure to stabilize as the engine
warms up.
NOTE:
High-speed, no-load running of a cold engine can result in excessive white smoke
and poor engine performance. No-load engine speeds should be kept under 1,200 rpm
during the warm-up period, especially in
cold, ambient temperature conditions.
If temperatures are below 32°F (0°C), operate
the engine at moderate speeds for five minutes
before full loads are applied.
Engine Idling – In Cold Weather
Avoid prolonged idling in ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C). Long periods of idling
may be harmful to your engine because combustion chamber temperatures can drop so low
that the fuel may not burn completely. Incomplete combustion allows carbon and varnish to
form on piston rings and injector nozzles. Also,
the unburned fuel can enter the crankcase,
diluting the oil and causing rapid wear to the
engine.
Stopping the Engine
The following chart should be used as a guide
in determining the amount of engine idle time
required to sufficiently cool down the turbo-
charger before shut down, depending upon the
type of driving and the amount of cargo.
charger. This is particularly necessary after
any period of hard driving.
Before turning off your turbo diesel engine,
always allow the engine to return to normal
idle speed and run for several seconds. This
assures proper lubrication of the turbo-
Idle the engine a few minutes before routine
shutdown. After full load operation, idle the
engine three to five minutes before shutting it
down. This idle period will allow the lubricating
Driving Conditions
Stop & Go
Stop & Go
Highway Speeds
City Traffic
Highway Speeds
Uphill Grade
STOP/START SYSTEM — DIESEL
MODELS WITH MANUAL
TRANSMISSION ONLY
The Stop/Start function is developed to save
fuel and reduce emissions. The system will stop
the engine automatically during a vehicle stop
if the required conditions are met. Pressing the
clutch pedal will automatically re-start the vehicle.
oil and coolant to carry excess heat away from
the combustion chamber, bearings, internal
components, and turbocharger. This is especially important for turbocharged, charge air
cooled engines.
TURBOCHARGER ⬙COOL DOWN⬙ CHART
Load
Turbocharger Temperature
Empty
Medium
Medium
Max. GCWR
Max. GCWR
Max. GCWR
Cool
Warm
Warm
Warm
Warm
Hot
Automatic Mode
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every
normal customer engine start. It will remain in
STOP/START NOT READY until you drive forward with a vehicle speed greater than 3 mph
(5 km/h). At that time, the system will go into
STOP/START READY and if all other conditions
are met, can go into an STOP/START AUTO
STOP ACTIVE mode.
Idle Time (In Minutes) Before Shut
Down
Less than 1
1
2
3
4
5
To Activate The STOP/START AUTO STOP
ACTIVE Mode, The Following Must Occur:
1. The system must be in STOP/START READY
state. A STOP/START READY message will be
displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
183
2. Vehicle speed must be less 3 mph (5 km/h).
• When driving in REVERSE
3. Shifter must be in the NEUTRAL position
and the clutch pedal must be fully released
• Hood is open
• Vehicle is in 4LO transfer case mode
• Battery voltage drops too low
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will
fall to the Stop/Start position, the STOP/
START AUTO STOP ACTIVE message will appear, and the heater/air conditioning (HVAC) air
flow will be reduced.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven
several times without the STOP/START system
going into a STOP/START READY state under
more extreme conditions of the items listed
above.
• Vehicle is moving faster than 3 mph (5 km/h)
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
AUTO STOP
Prior to engine shut down, the system will
check many safety and comfort conditions to
see if they are fulfilled. In following situations
the engine will not stop:
To Start The Engine While In The
STOP/START AUTO STOP ACTIVE Mode
When the shift lever is in NEUTRAL, the engine
will start when the clutch pedal is pressed. The
vehicle will go into STOP/START SYSTEM NOT
READY mode until the vehicle speed is greater
than 3 mph (5 km/h).
• Driver’s seat belt is not buckled
• Outside temperature is less than 1°F (–17°C)
or greater than 104°F (40°C)
• Actual cabin temperature is significantly different than temperature set on Auto HVAC
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode
• Engine has not reached normal operating
temperature
• Battery discharged
184
Conditions that will cause the engine to start
automatically while in STOP/START AUTO
STOP ACTIVE mode
The Engine Will Start Automatically When:
• Actual cabin temperature is significantly different than temperature set on Auto HVAC
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode
• STOP/START AUTO STOP ACTIVE time exceeds 5 minutes
• Low brake vacuum e.g. after several brake
pedal applications
• STOP/START OFF switch is pressed
• 4WD system is put into 4LO mode
Conditions that force a manual key cycle
start while in STOP/START AUTO STOP ACTIVE mode:
The Engine Will Not Start Automatically If:
• The driver’s seatbelt was unbuckled
• The engine hood has been opened
• A STOP/START system error occurs
The engine may then only be restarted with an
ignition key cycle. The STOP/START KEY
START REQUIRED message will appear in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
under these conditions. Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the
STOP/START system) the engine will not be
stopped.
To Manually Turn Off The Start Stop
System
4. If the STOP/START system is manually
turned off. the engine can only be started and
stopped by cycling the ignition switch
1. Press the STOP/START Off switch (located
on the switch bank). The light on the switch will
illuminate.
5. The STOP/START system will reset itself
back to an ON condition every time the key is
turned off and back on.
To Manually Turn On The Start Stop
System
1. Press the STOP/START Off switch (located
on the switch bank).
2. The light on the switch will turn off.
STOP/START OFF Switch
2. The STOP/START OFF message will appear
in Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
System Malfunction
If there is a malfunction in the STOP/START
system, the system will not shut down the
engine. A SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM
message will appear in the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The system will need to be checked by your
authorized dealer.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF
EQUIPPED
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended without having the parking
brake fully applied. The parking brake should
always be applied when the driver is not in the
vehicle, especially on an incline.
CAUTION!
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch
pedal, or attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill
with the clutch pedal partially engaged, as this
will cause abnormal wear on the clutch.
185
NOTE:
During cold weather, you may experience
increased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid warms up. This is normal.
Shifting
Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting
gears. As you release the clutch pedal, lightly
press the accelerator pedal.
You should always use first gear when starting
from a standing position if under heavy load or
when pulling a trailer.
Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds
To utilize your manual transmission efficiently
for both fuel economy and performance, it
should be upshifted as listed in recommended
shift speed chart. Shift at the vehicle speeds
listed for acceleration. When heavily loaded or
pulling a trailer these recommended up-shift
speeds may not apply.
Shift Pattern
Engine
3.8L Gasoline
2.8L Diesel
186
Speeds
Accel.
Cruise
Accel.
Cruise
Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
1 to 2
2 to 3
3 to 4
15 (24)
24 (39)
34 (55)
10 (16)
19 (31)
27 (43)
15 (24)
24 (39)
34 (55)
10 (16)
19 (31)
27 (43)
4 to 5
47 (76)
37 (60)
47 (76)
37 (60)
5 to 6
56 (90)
41 (66)
56 (90)
41 (66)
Downshifting
Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear
is recommended to preserve brakes when driving down steep hills. In addition, downshifting
at the right time provides better acceleration
when you desire to resume speed. Downshift
progressively. Do not skip gears to avoid overspeeding the engine and clutch.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking
on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could
lose their grip, and the vehicle could skid.
CAUTION!
When descending a hill, be very careful to
downshift one gear at a time to prevent overspeeding the engine which can cause valve
damage, and/or clutch disc damage, even if
the clutch pedal is pressed.
Maximum Recommended Downshift
Speeds
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the recommended downshifting speeds may cause the engine to overspeed and/or damage the clutch disc, even if
the clutch pedal is pressed.
Manual Transmission Downshift Speeds
in MPH (KM/H)
Gear
Se3 to
2 to
6 to 5 5 to 4 4 to 3
lec2
1
tion
Maxi80
70
50
30
15
mum (129) (113) (81)
(48)
(24)
Speed
Reverse Shifting
To shift into REVERSE, bring the vehicle to a
complete stop. Press the clutch and pause
briefly to allow the gear train to stop rotating.
Beginning from the NEUTRAL position, move
the shift lever in one quick, smooth motion
straight across and into the REVERSE area (the
driver will feel a firm “click” as the shifter
passes the “knock-over”). Complete the shift
by pulling the shift lever into REVERSE.
The “knock-over” prevents the driver from accidentally entering the REVERSE shift area and
warns the driver that they are about to shift the
transmission into REVERSE. Due to this feature,
a slow shift to REVERSE can be perceived as a
high shift effort.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF
EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has
come to a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and
the engine is at idle speed.
(Continued)
187
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or
NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the
engine is above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of
PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is
higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly
on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could
lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and when your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition
Park Interlock which requires the shift lever to
be placed in PARK prior to rotating the key to
the LOCK position. The key can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition is in
188
the LOCK position and once removed the shift
lever is locked in PARK.
Brake/Transmission Interlock
System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the
shift lever in the PARK position when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position and
the brake pedal is not pressed. To move the
shift lever out of the PARK position, the ignition
switch must be turned to either the ON or
START position (engine running or not) and the
brake pedal must be pressed.
Four-Speed Automatic Transmission
With Overdrive (3.8L Engine)
Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE (or
from P or R to D) should be done only after the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is
stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
when moving the shift lever between these
gears.
Shift Lever
Gear Ranges
NOTE:
Under extreme cold temperatures (-10°F
(-23°C) and when in DRIVE, transmission
operation may be briefly limited to only
second gear operation. Normal operation
will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL position into another gear
range.
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be
started in this range. Never use PARK while the
vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking brake
when leaving the vehicle in this range. Always
apply the parking brake first, then place the
shift lever in the PARK position.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute
for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against
vehicle movement and possible injury or
damage.
• It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of
PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is
higher than the idle speed. If your foot is not
firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and when
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle backward.
Use only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
NEUTRAL
This range is used when vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with engine running. Engine
may be started in this range. Set the parking
brake if you must leave the vehicle.
NOTE:
Towing, coasting, or driving the vehicle for
any other reason with the shift lever in
NEUTRAL can result in severe transmission
damage. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in
“Starting and Operating” and “Towing a Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
OVERDRIVE
This range is used for most city and highway
driving. The transmission contains an
electronically-controlled fourth gear Overdrive,
and will automatically shift from DRIVE to
OVERDRIVE if the following conditions are
present:
• The shift lever is in DRIVE.
• The O/D OFF switch has not been activated.
• Vehicle speed is above approximately
30 mph (48 km/h).
When frequent transmission shifting occurs
while using Overdrive, such as when operating
the vehicle under heavy load conditions (for
example, in hilly terrain, strong head winds, or
trailer towing), turning off overdrive will improve
performance and extend transmission life by
reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
O/D OFF Switch
Overdrive can be locked out by pressing the
O/D OFF switch located on the center console.
A indicator light in the instrument cluster will
189
illuminate to show that the switch has been
activated. When the indicator light is on, Overdrive is locked out. Pressing the switch a second time restores the Overdrive function. The
lockout feature is useful when towing a trailer or
carrying a heavy load.
CAUTION!
Continuing to drive with the Transmission
Temperature “HOTOIL” Warning Message illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
If the transmission overheats, a “HOTOIL” message may be displayed in the odometer (accompanied by a chime sound). If the “HOTOIL”
message turns on, stop the vehicle and run the
engine at idle or faster, with the transmission in
NEUTRAL until the message turns off.
2 (Second)
This range is used for moderate grades and to
assist braking on dry pavement or in mud and
snow. The vehicle begins from a stop in low
gear with automatic upshift to second gear. The
vehicle will not shift into third gear.
WARNING!
If the Transmission Temperature “HOTOIL”
Warning Message is illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle, in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to boil over,
come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire.
190
1 (First)
This range is used for hard pulling at low
speeds in mud, sand, snow, or on steep
grades. The vehicle begins and stays in low
gear with no upshift. This gear provides engine
compression braking at low speeds.
CAUTION!
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK,
you must turn the ignition from LOCK so
the steering wheel and shift lever are released. Otherwise, damage to the steering
column or shift lever could result.
• Never race the engine with the brakes on
and the vehicle in gear, and never hold the
vehicle on an incline without applying the
brakes. These practices can overheat and
damage the transmission.
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving
between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not
spin the wheels faster than 15 mph
(24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that
could result in transmission damage, the Transmission Limp Home Mode will be engaged. In
this mode, the transmission will operate (when
in DRIVE) in second gear only.
To reset the transmission, use the following
procedure:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Move the shift lever to the PARK position.
3. Turn OFF the engine and be sure to turn the
key fob to the LOCK position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds, then restart
the engine.
5. Move the shift lever to the desired gear
range.
If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will return to normal operation. If the
problem persists, PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. Only second
gear will operate in the DRIVE position. Have
the transmission checked at your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy
has been added to the automatic transmission
of this vehicle. A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated
speeds. This may result in a slightly different
feeling or response during normal operation in
high gear. When the vehicle speed drops or
during acceleration, the clutch automatically
and smoothly disengages.
Five–Speed Automatic Transmission
(2.8L Diesel Engine)
The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are self-calibrating; therefore,
the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be
somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition
and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles/kilometers.
Gear Ranges
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage
before accelerating. This is especially important when the engine is cold. If there is a
need to restart the engine, be sure to cycle
the key to the LOCK position before restarting. Transmission gear engagement may be
delayed after restarting the engine if the key
is not cycled to the LOCK position first.
PARK
This gear position supplements the parking
brake by locking the transmission. The engine
can be started in this range. Never use PARK
while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking
brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.
Always apply the parking brake first, then place
the shift lever in the PARK position.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute
for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against
vehicle movement and possible injury or
damage.
• It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of
PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is
higher than idle speed. If your foot is not
firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in REVERSE.
You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and when
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
191
REVERSE
Use this range only after the vehicle has come
to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL
Shift into NEUTRAL when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running. The engine may be started in this range.
Set the parking brake if you must leave the
vehicle.
NOTE:
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for
any other reason with the shift lever in
NEUTRAL can result in severe transmission
damage. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in
“Starting and Operating” and “Towing a Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
DRIVE
The transmission automatically upshifts
through fifth gear. The DRIVE position provides
optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
192
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control
allows you to move the shift lever left (-) or right
(+) when the shift lever is in the DRIVE position,
allowing the selection of the desired top gear.
For example, if the driver shifts the transmission
into third gear, the transmission will never shift
above third gear, but can shift down to second
gear or first gear, when needed.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking
on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could
lose their grip and the vehicle could skid.
Screen Display
Actual Gear(s)
Allowed
1
1
2
1-2
3
1-3
4
1-4
D
1-5
NOTE:
To select the proper gear position for maximum deceleration (engine braking), move
the shift lever to the left “D (-)” and hold it
there. The transmission will shift to the
range from which the vehicle can best be
slowed down.
Overdrive Operation
The overdrive automatic transmission contains
an electronically controlled fifth gear (OVERDRIVE). The transmission will automatically
shift from fourth gear to OVERDRIVE if the
following conditions are present:
• the shift lever is in DRIVE
• the engine coolant has reached normal operating temperature
• the vehicle speed is above approximately
30 mph (48 km/h)
• the transmission has reached normal operating temperature
NOTE:
If the vehicle is started in extremely cold
temperatures, the transmission may not
shift into OVERDRIVE and will automatically
select the most desirable gear for operation
at this temperature. Normal operation will
resume when the transmission fluid temperature has risen to a suitable level. Refer
to the “Note” under “Torque Converter
Clutch” later in this section.
During cold temperature operation, you may
notice delayed upshifts depending on engine and transmission temperature. This
feature improves the warm up time of the
engine and transmission.
During cold temperature operation, the
transmission may not downshift from second gear into first gear after the initial first to
second gear upshift.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that
could result in transmission damage, the Trans-
mission Limp Home Mode will be engaged. In
this mode, the transmission will remain in the
current gear until the vehicle is brought to a
stop.
To reset the transmission, use the following
procedure:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Move the shift lever to the PARK position.
3. Turn OFF the engine and be sure to turn the
key to the LOCK position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds, then restart
the engine.
5. Move the shift lever to the desired gear
range.
If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will return to normal operation. If the
problem persists, PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. Only second
gear range will operate in the DRIVE position.
Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy
has been included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle. A clutch within the torque
converter engages automatically at a calibrated speed at light throttle. It engages at
higher speeds under heavier acceleration. This
may result in a slightly different feeling or
response during normal operation in high gear.
When the vehicle speed drops below a calibrated speed, or during acceleration, the
clutch automatically and smoothly disengages.
NOTE:
If the vehicle has not been driven in several
days, the first few seconds of operation after
shifting the transmission into gear may
seem sluggish. This is due to the fluid partially draining from the torque converter into
the transmission. This condition is normal
and will not cause damage to the transmission. The torque converter will refill within
five seconds of starting the engine.
193
FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
(COMMAND-TRAC I姞 OR
ROCK-TRAC姞)
The transfer case is intended to be driven in the
2H position for normal street and highway
conditions such as hard-surfaced roads.
Operating Instructions/Precautions
In the event that additional traction is required,
the transfer case 4H and 4L positions can be
used to lock the front and rear driveshafts
together, forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished
by simply moving the shift lever to one of these
positions. The 4H and 4L positions are intended for loose, slippery road surfaces only
and not intended for normal driving. Driving in
the 4H and 4L positions on hard-surfaced
roads will cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components.
The transfer case provides four mode positions:
• 2H (Two-wheel drive high range)
• 4H (Four-wheel drive high range)
• N (Neutral)
• 4L (Four-wheel drive low range)
The “4WD Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) alerts the driver that the vehicle is in four-wheel drive, and the front and
rear driveshafts are locked together. The light
will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted
into the 4H position.
Four-Wheel Drive Shift Controls
194
NOTE:
Do not attempt to shift when only the front or
rear wheels are spinning. The transfer case
is not equipped with a synchronizer, and the
front and rear driveshaft speeds must be
equal for a shift to take place. Shifting while
only the front or rear wheels are spinning
can cause damage to the transfer case.
When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine
speed will be approximately three times (four
times for Rubicon models) that of the 2H or 4H
positions at a given road speed. Take care not
to overspeed the engine.
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
depends on tires of equal size, type, and
circumference on each wheel. Any difference
will adversely affect shifting and cause damage
to the transfer case.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved
traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe
turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster
than road conditions permit.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in
the N (Neutral) position without first fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer case N
(Neutral) position disengages both the front
and rear driveshaft from the powertrain, and
will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the
transmission position. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
Shift Positions
For additional information on the appropriate
use of each transfer case mode position, see
the information below:
2H Position
This range is used for normal street and highway driving on hard-surfaced roads.
4H Position
This range locks the front and rear driveshafts
together, forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. This range (4H)
provides additional traction for loose, slippery
road surfaces and should not be used on dry
pavement.
NOTE:
When in 4WD, the “ESC Off Indicator Light”
will display in the instrument cluster.
The “4WD Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted into the 4H position.
Shifting Procedure
N (Neutral) Position
This range disengages the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain. It is to be used for
flat towing behind another vehicle. Refer to
“Recreational Towing” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
4L Position
This range locks the front and rear driveshafts
together, forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. This range (4L)
provides additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces
only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
The “4WD Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted into the 4L position.
2H to 4H or 4H to 2H
Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with
the vehicle stopped or in motion. With the
vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/
disengage faster if you momentarily release the
accelerator pedal after completing the shift.
Apply a constant force when shifting the transfer case lever.
4H to 4L or 4L to 4H
With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to
5 km/h), shift an automatic transmission into
NEUTRAL (N), or press the clutch pedal on a
manual transmission. While the vehicle is
coasting at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift the
transfer case lever firmly to the desired position. Do not pause with the transfer case in N
(Neutral). Once the shift is completed, place
the automatic transmission into DRIVE or release the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.
195
NOTE:
Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the
vehicle completely stopped; however, difficulty may occur due to the mating teeth not
being properly aligned. Several attempts
may be required for clutch teeth alignment
and shift completion to occur. The preferred
method is with the vehicle rolling at 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h). Avoid attempting to
engage or disengage 4L with the vehicle
moving faster than 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
WARNING!
Failure to engage a position completely can
cause transfer case damage or loss of power
and vehicle control. You could have a collision. Do not drive the vehicle unless the
transfer case is fully engaged.
TRAC-LOK姞 REAR AXLE — IF
EQUIPPED
The Trac-Lok姞 rear axle provides a constant
driving force to both rear wheels and reduces
wheel spin caused by the loss of traction at one
driving wheel. If traction differs between the two
196
rear wheels, the differential automatically proportions the usable torque by providing more
torque to the wheel that has traction.
Trac-Lok姞 is especially helpful during slippery
driving conditions. With both rear wheels on a
slippery surface, a slight application of the
accelerator will supply maximum traction.
WARNING!
On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip differential, never run the engine with one rear
wheel off the ground. The vehicle may drive
through the rear wheel remaining on the
ground and cause you to lose control of your
vehicle.
AXLE LOCK (TRU–LOK姞) —
RUBICON MODELS
The AXLE LOCK switch is located on the instrument panel (to the left of the steering column).
Axle Lock Switch
This feature will only activate when the following
conditions are met:
• Key in ignition, vehicle in 4L (Low) range.
• Vehicle speed should be 10 mph (16 km/h)
or less.
To activate the system, press the bottom of the
AXLE LOCK switch once to lock the rear axle
only (the “Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light” will
illuminate), press the bottom of the switch again
to lock the front axle (the “Front Axle Lock
Indicator Light” will illuminate). When the rear
axle is locked, pressing the switch again will
lock or unlock the front axle.
NOTE:
The indicator lights will flash until the axles
are fully locked or unlocked.
To unlock the axles, press the top of the AXLE
LOCK switch.
Axle lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken
out of 4L (Low) range, or the ignition switch is
turned to the OFF position.
ELECTRONIC SWAY BAR
DISCONNECT — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with an electronic disconnecting stabilizer/sway bar. This
system allows greater front suspension travel in
off-road situations.
This system is controlled by the SWAY BAR
switch located on the instrument panel (to the
left of the steering column).
Sway Bar Switch
Press the SWAY BAR switch to activate the
system. Press the switch again to deactivate
the system. The “Sway Bar Indicator Light”
(located in the instrument cluster) will illuminate
when the bar is disconnected. The “Sway Bar
Indicator Light” will flash during activation transition, or when activation conditions are not
met. The stabilizer/sway bar should remain in
on-road mode during normal driving conditions.
WARNING!
Do not disconnect the stabilizer bar and drive
on hard-surfaced roads or at speeds above
18 mph (29 km/h); you may lose control of the
vehicle, which could result in serious injury.
The front stabilizer bar enhances vehicle stability and is necessary for maintaining control
of the vehicle. The system monitors vehicle
speed and will attempt to reconnect the stabilizer bar at speeds over 18 mph (29 km/h).
This is indicated by a flashing or solid “Sway
Bar Indicator Light.” Once vehicle speed is
reduced below 14 mph (22 km/h), the system
will once again attempt to return to off-road
mode.
To disconnect the stabilizer/sway bar, shift to
either 4H or 4L and press the SWAY BAR switch
to obtain the off-road position. Refer to “FourWheel Drive Operation” in “Starting and Operating” for further information. The “Sway Bar
Indicator Light” will flash until the stabilizer/
sway bar has been fully disconnected.
197
NOTE:
The stabilizer/sway bar may be torque
locked due to left and right suspension
height differences. This condition is due to
driving surface differences or vehicle loading. In order for the stabilizer/sway bar to
disconnect/reconnect, the right and left
halves of the bar must be aligned. This
alignment may require that the vehicle be
driven onto level ground or rocked from side
to side.
To return to on-road mode, press the SWAY
BAR switch again.
WARNING!
If the stabilizer/sway bar will not return to
on-road mode, vehicle stability is greatly reduced. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle
over 18 mph (29 km/h). Driving faster than
18 mph (29 km/h) may cause loss of control of
the vehicle, which could result in serious
injury. Contact your local authorized dealer for
assistance.
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance
and a narrower track to make them capable of
performing in a wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design characteristics give
them a higher center of gravity than ordinary
cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance
is a better view of the road, allowing you to
anticipate problems. They are not designed for
cornering at the same speeds as conventional
two-wheel drive vehicles any more than lowslung sports cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily in off-road conditions. If at all
possible, avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this type, failure
to operate this vehicle correctly may result in
loss of control or vehicle rollover.
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Side Step Removal – If Equipped
NOTE:
Prior to off-road usage, the side steps
should be removed to prevent damage.
1. Remove the two nuts from the bodyside.
198
2. Remove one bolt from the underside of the
vehicle.
3. Remove the side step assembly.
The Basics Of Off-Road Driving
You will encounter many types of terrain driving
off-road. You should be familiar with the terrain
and area before proceeding. There are many
types of surface conditions: hard-packed dirt,
gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow and ice.
Every surface has a different effect on your
vehicle’s steering, handling and traction. Controlling your vehicle is one of the keys to successful off-road driving, so always keep a firm
grip on the steering wheel and maintain a good
driving posture. Avoid sudden accelerations,
turns or braking. In most cases, there are no
road signs, posted speed limits or signal lights.
Therefore, you will need to use your own good
judgment on what is safe and what is not. When
on a trail, you should always be looking ahead
for surface obstacles and changes in terrain.
The key is to plan your future driving route while
remembering what you are currently driving
over.
CAUTION!
Never park your vehicle over dry grass or
other combustible materials. The heat from
your vehicle exhaust system could cause a
fire.
WARNING!
Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down
cargo. Unsecured cargo can become projectiles in an off-road situation.
When To Use 4L (Low) Range
When off-road driving, shift into 4L (Low) for
additional traction and control on slippery or
difficult terrain, ascending or descending steep
hills, and to increase low speed pulling power.
This range should be limited to extreme situations such as deep snow, mud, steep inclines,
or sand where additional low speed pulling
power is needed. Vehicle speeds in excess of
25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided when in
4L (Low) range.
Simultaneous Brake And Throttle
Operation
Many off-road driving conditions require the
simultaneous use of the brake and throttle
(two-footed driving). When climbing rocks,
logs, or other stepped objects, using light
brake pressure with light throttle will keep the
vehicle from jerking or lurching. This technique
is also used when you need to stop and restart
a vehicle on a steep incline.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
Snow
In heavy snow or for additional control and
traction at slower speeds, shift the transmission
into a low gear and the transfer case into 4L
(Low) if necessary. Do not shift to a lower gear
than necessary to maintain headway. Overrevving the engine can spin the wheels and
traction will be lost. If you start to slow to a stop,
try turning your steering wheel no more than a
1/4 turn quickly back and forth, while still applying throttle. This will allow the tires to get a
fresh ⬙bite⬙ and help maintain your momentum.
199
CAUTION!
On icy or slippery roads, do not downshift at
high engine RPM or vehicle speeds, because
engine braking may cause skidding and loss
of control.
Mud
Deep mud creates a great deal of suction
around the tires and is very difficult to get
through. You should use second gear (manual
transmission), or DRIVE (automatic transmission), with the transfer case in the 4L (Low)
position to maintain your momentum. If you
start to slow to a stop, try turning your steering
wheel no more than a 1/4 turn quickly back and
forth for additional traction. Mud holes pose an
increased threat of vehicle damage and getting
stuck. They are normally full of debris from
previous vehicles getting stuck. As a good
practice before entering any mud hole, get out
and determine how deep it is, if there are any
hidden obstacles and if the vehicle can be
safely recovered if stuck.
200
Sand
Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with
full tire pressure. When crossing soft, sandy
spots in a trail, maintain your vehicle’s momentum and do not stop. The key to driving in soft
sand is using the appropriate tire pressure,
accelerating slowly, avoiding abrupt maneuvers and maintaining the vehicle’s momentum.
If you are going to be driving on large soft
sandy areas or dunes, reduce your tire pressure to a minimum of 15 psi (103 kPa) to allow
for a greater tire surface area. Reduced tire
pressure will drastically improve your traction
and handling while driving on the soft sand, but
you must return the tires to normal air pressure
before driving on pavement or other hard surfaces. Be sure you have a way to reinflate the
tires prior to reducing the pressure.
CAUTION!
Reduced tire pressures may cause tire unseating and total loss of air pressure. To
reduce the risk of tire unseating, while at a
reduced tire pressure, reduce your speed and
avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And
Other High Points)
While driving off-road, you will encounter many
types of terrain. These varying types of terrain
bring different types of obstacles. Before proceeding, review the path ahead to determine
the correct approach and your ability to safely
recover the vehicle if something goes wrong.
Keeping a firm grip on the steering wheel, bring
the vehicle to a complete stop and then inch
the vehicle forward until it makes contact with
the object. Apply the throttle lightly while holding a light brake pressure and ease the vehicle
up and over the object.
WARNING!
Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steering
system loading which could cause you to
loose control of your vehicle.
Using A Spotter
There are many times where it is hard to see the
obstacle or determine the correct path. Determining the correct path can be extremely difficult when you are confronting many obstacles.
In these cases, have someone guide you over,
through, or around the obstacle. Have the
person stand a safe distance in front of you
where they can see the obstacle, watch your
tires and undercarriage, and guide you
through.
Crossing Large Rocks
When approaching large rocks, choose a path
which ensures you drive over the largest of
them with your tires. This will lift your undercarriage over the obstacle. The tread of the tire is
tougher and thicker than the side wall and is
designed to take the abuse. Always look ahead
and make every effort to cross the large rocks
with your tires.
CAUTION!
• Never attempt to straddle a rock that is
large enough to strike your axles or undercarriage.
• Never attempt to drive over a rock which is
large enough to contact the door sills.
Crossing A Ravine, Gully, Ditch, Washout
Or Rut
When crossing a ravine, gully, ditch, washout or
a large rut, the angled approach is the key to
maintaining your vehicle’s mobility. Approach
these obstacles at a 45-degree angle and let
each tire go through the obstacle independently. You need to use caution when crossing
large obstacles with steep sides. Do not attempt to cross any large obstacle with steep
sides at an angle great enough to put the
vehicle at risk of a rollover. If you get caught in
a rut, dig a small trench to the right or left at a
45-degree angle ahead of the front tires. Use
the removed dirt to fill the rut ahead of the
turnout you just created. You should now be
able to drive out following the trench you just
created at a 45-degree angle.
WARNING!
There is an increased risk of rollover when
crossing an obstacle, at any angle, with steep
sides.
Crossing Logs
To cross a log, approach it at a slight angle
(approximately 10 to 15 degrees). This allows
one front tire to be on top of the log while the
other just starts to climb the log. While climbing
the log, modulate your brake and accelerator to
avoid spinning the log out from under your tires.
Then ease the vehicle off the log using your
brakes.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to cross a log with a greater
diameter than the running ground clearance
or the vehicle will become high-centered.
Getting High-Centered
If you get hung up or high-centered on an
object, get out of the vehicle and try to determine what the vehicle is hung up on, where it is
contacting the underbody and what is the best
direction to recover the vehicle. Depending on
what you are in contact with, jack the vehicle up
and place a few rocks under the tires so the
weight is off of the high point when you let the
vehicle down. You can also try rocking the
vehicle or winching the vehicle off the object.
201
CAUTION!
Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard objects increases the risk of underbody damage.
Hill Climbing
Hill climbing requires good judgment and a
good understanding of your abilities and your
vehicle’s limitations. Hills can cause serious
problems. Some are just too steep to climb and
should not be attempted. You should always
feel confident with the vehicle and your abilities. You should always climb hills straight up
and down. Never attempt to climb a hill on an
angle.
Before Climbing A Steep Hill
As you approach a hill, consider its grade or
steepness. Determine if it is too steep. Look to
see what the traction is on the hill side trail. Is
the trail straight up and down? What is on top
and the other side? Are there ruts, rocks,
branches or other obstacles on the path? Can
you safely recover the vehicle if something
goes wrong? If everything looks good and you
feel confident, shift the transmission into a
202
lower gear with 4L (Low) engaged, and proceed with caution, maintaining your momentum
as you climb the hill.
Driving Up Hill
Once you have determined your ability to proceed and have shifted into the appropriate
gear, line your vehicle up for the straightest
possible run. Accelerate with an easy constant
throttle and apply more power as you start up
the hill. Do not race forward into a steep grade;
the abrupt change of grade could cause you to
lose control. If the front end begins to bounce,
ease off the throttle slightly to bring all four tires
back on the ground. As you approach the crest
of the hill, ease off the throttle and slowly
proceed over the top. If the wheels start to slip
as you approach the crest of a hill, ease off the
accelerator and maintain headway by turning
the steering wheel no more than a 1/4 turn
quickly back and forth. This will provide a fresh
⬙bite⬙ into the surface and will usually provide
enough traction to complete the climb. If you
do not make it to the top, place the vehicle in
REVERSE and back straight down the grade
using engine resistance along with the vehicle
brakes.
WARNING!
Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or
turn around on a steep grade. Driving across
an incline increases the risk of a rollover,
which may result in severe injury.
Driving Downhill
Before driving down a steep hill, you need to
determine if it is too steep for a safe descent.
What is the surface traction? Is the grade too
steep to maintain a slow, controlled descent?
Are there obstacles? Is it a straight descent? Is
there plenty of distance at the base of the hill to
regain control if the vehicle descends to fast? If
you feel confident in your ability to proceed,
then make sure you are in 4L (Low) and proceed with caution. Allow engine braking to
control the descent and apply your brakes, if
necessary, but do not allow the tires to lock.
WARNING!
Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL.
Use vehicle brakes in conjunction with engine
braking. Descending a grade too fast could
cause you to lose control and be seriously
injured.
Driving Across An Incline
If at all possible, avoid driving across an incline. If it is necessary, know your vehicle’s
abilities. Driving across an incline places more
weight on the downhill wheels, which increases
the possibilities of a downhill slide or rollover.
Make sure the surface has good traction with
firm and stable soils. If possible, transverse the
incline at an angle heading slightly up or down.
WARNING!
Driving across an incline increases the risk of
a rollover, which may result in severe injury.
If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway
If you stall or begin to lose headway while
climbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come
to a stop and immediately apply the brake.
Restart the engine and shift into REVERSE.
Back slowly down the hill allowing engine braking to control the descent and apply your
brakes, if necessary, but do not allow the tires
to lock.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or
cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or
grade, never attempt to turn around. To do so
may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle,
which may result in severe injury. Always back
carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE
gear. Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL
using only the vehicle brakes. Never drive
diagonally across a hill; always drive straight
up or down.
lightly and avoid damage to the environment.
You should know your vehicle’s abilities and be
able to recover it if something goes wrong. You
should never stop or shut a vehicle off when
crossing deep water unless you ingested water
into the engine air intake. If the engine stalls, do
not attempt to restart it. Determine if it has
ingested water first. The key to any crossing is
low and slow. Shift into first gear (manual
transmission), or DRIVE (automatic transmission), with the transfer case in the 4L (Low)
position and proceed very slowly with a constant slow speed {3 to 5 mph (5 to 8 km/h)
maximum} and light throttle. Keep the vehicle
moving; do not try to accelerate through the
crossing. After crossing any water higher than
the bottom of the axle differentials, you should
inspect all of the vehicle fluids for signs of water
ingestion.
Driving Through Water
Extreme care should be taken crossing any
type of water. Water crossings should be
avoided, if possible, and only be attempted
when necessary in a safe, responsible manner.
You should only drive through areas which are
designated and approved. You should tread
203
CAUTION!
• Water ingestion into the axles, transmission, transfer case, engine or vehicle interior can occur if you drive too fast or
through too deep of water. Water can
cause permanent damage to engine, driveline or other vehicle components, and your
brakes will be less effective once wet
and/or muddy.
• This vehicle is capable of crossing through
water at a depth of 30 inches (76 cm) at
speeds no greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Water ingestion can occur causing damage
to your vehicle.
Before You Cross Any Type Of Water
As you approach any type of water, you need to
determine if you can cross it safely and responsibly. If necessary, get out and walk through the
water or probe it with a stick. You need to be
sure of its depth, approach angle, current and
bottom condition. Be careful of murky or muddy
waters; check for hidden obstacles. Make sure
you will not be intruding on any wildlife, and you
can recover the vehicle if necessary. The key to
204
a safe crossing is the water depth, current and
bottom conditions. On soft bottoms, the vehicle
will sink in, effectively increasing the water level
on the vehicle. Be sure to consider this when
determining the depth and the ability to safely
cross.
Crossing Puddles, Pools, Flooded Areas
Or Other Standing Water
Puddles, pools, flooded or other standing water
areas normally contain murky or muddy waters.
These water types normally contain hidden
obstacles and make it difficult to determine an
accurate water depth, approach angle, and
bottom condition. Murky or muddy water holes
are where you want to hook up tow straps prior
to entering. This makes for a faster, cleaner and
easier vehicle recovery. If you are able to
determine you can safely cross, than proceed
using the low and slow method.
CAUTION!
Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system
effectiveness by depositing debris onto the
radiator.
Crossing Ditches, Streams, Shallow Rivers
Or Other Flowing Water
Flowing water can be extremely dangerous.
Never attempt to cross a fast running stream or
river even in shallow water. Fast moving water
can easily push your vehicle downstream,
sweeping it out of control. Even in very shallow
water, a high current can still wash the dirt out
from around your tires putting you and your
vehicle in jeopardy. There is still a high risk of
personal injury and vehicle damage with slower
water currents in depths greater than the vehicle’s running ground clearance. You should
never attempt to cross flowing water which is
deeper than the vehicle’s running ground clearance. Even the slowest current can push the
heaviest vehicle downstream and out of control
if the water is deep enough to push on the large
surface area of the vehicle’s body. Before you
proceed, determine the speed of the current,
the water’s depth, approach angle, bottom
condition and if there are any obstacles. Then
cross at an angle heading slightly upstream
using the low and slow technique.
WARNING!
Never drive through fast moving deep water. It
can push your vehicle downstream, sweeping
it out of control. This could put you and your
passengers at risk of injury or drowning.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your
vehicle than does most on-road driving. After
going off-road, it is always a good idea to
check for damage. That way you can get any
problems taken care of right away and have
your vehicle ready when you need it.
• Completely inspect the underbody of your
vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and exhaust system for
damage.
• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and
clean as required.
• Check threaded fasteners for looseness,
particularly on the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
values specified in the Service Manual.
• Check for accumulations of plants or brush.
These things could be a fire hazard. They
might hide damage to fuel lines, brake
hoses, axle pinion seals, and propeller
shafts.
POWER STEERING
• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected and cleaned
as soon as possible.
The standard power steering system will give
you good vehicle response and increased ease
of maneuverability in tight spaces. The system
will provide mechanical steering capability if
power assist is lost.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes
may cause excessive wear or unpredictable
braking. You might not have full braking power
when you need it to prevent a collision. If you
have been operating your vehicle in dirty
conditions, get your brakes checked and
cleaned as necessary.
• If you experience unusual vibration after
driving in mud, slush or similar conditions,
check the wheels for impacted material. Im-
pacted material can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct
the situation.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will still be possible to steer your
vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort,
especially at very low vehicle speeds and
during parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the
steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a
problem with the power steering system.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the
power steering pump may make noise for
a short amount of time. This is due to the
cold, thick fluid in the steering system.
205
This noise should be considered normal,
and it does not in any way damage the
steering system.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power
steering assist could pose a safety risk to
yourself and others. Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at
the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it
should be avoided when possible. Damage to
the power steering pump may occur.
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a
defined service interval is not required. The
fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are apparent, and/or
the system is not functioning as anticipated.
Coordinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.
206
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power
steering system as the chemicals can damage your power steering components. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
to leave an automatic transmission in PARK, or
manual transmission in REVERSE or first gear.
The parking brake lever is located in the center
console. To apply the parking brake, pull the
lever up as firmly as possible. To release the
parking brake, pull the lever up slightly, press
the center button, then lower the lever completely.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level
surface and with the engine off to prevent
injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do not overfill. Use
only manufacturer’s recommended power
steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper
indicated level. With a clean cloth, wipe any
spilled fluid from all surfaces. Refer to “Fluids,
Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for further information.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the
parking brake is fully applied. Also, be certain
Parking Brake
When the parking brake is applied with the
ignition switch ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the
automatic transmission is placed in gear,
the “Brake Warning Light” will flash. If
vehicle speed is detected, a chime will
sound to alert the driver. Fully release the
parking brake before attempting to move
the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking
brake is applied. It does not show the
degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade. For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake
before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking
mechanism may make it difficult to move the
shift lever out of PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied whenever the driver
is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position on an automatic transmission as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against
vehicle movement and possible injury or
damage.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle.
Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
• Do not leave the key in the ignition. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving; failure to do so can
lead to brake failure and a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Always fully apply the parking brake when
leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause
damage or injury. Also, be certain to leave
an automatic transmission in PARK, a
manual transmission in REVERSE or first
gear. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with
the parking brake released, a brake system
malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designed
to aid the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system
operates with a separate computer to modulate
hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lock-up
and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.
207
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same
size and type, and tires must be properly
inflated to produce accurate signals for the
computer.
WARNING!
Significant over or under-inflation of tires, or
mixing sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle
can lead to loss of braking effectiveness.
The Anti-Lock Brake System conducts a low
speed self-test at about 12 mph (20 km/h). If for
any reason your foot is on the brake when the
vehicle reaches 12 mph (20 km/h), this check
will be delayed until 25 mph (40 km/h).
The Anti-Lock Brake System pump motor runs
during the self-test, and during an ABS stop, to
provide the regulated hydraulic pressure. The
motor pump makes a low humming noise during operation; this is normal.
208
WARNING!
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a
collision. Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on your
brake pedal when you need to slow down
or stop.
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can they increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that
afforded by the condition of the vehicle
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, following another vehicle too closely,
or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless
or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
CAUTION!
The Anti-Lock Brake System is subject to
possible detrimental effects of electronic interference caused by improperly installed aftermarket radios or telephones.
NOTE:
During severe braking conditions, a pulsing
sensation may occur and a clicking noise
will be heard. This is normal, indicating that
the Anti-Lock Brake System is functioning.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL
SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced
electronic brake control system that includes
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Traction Control
System (TCS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill
Start Assist (HSA), Electronic Roll Mitigation
(ERM), Electronic Stability Control (ESC), Trailer
Sway Control (TSC), and Hill Descent Control
(HDC). All of these systems work together to
enhance vehicle stability and control in various
driving conditions, and are commonly referred
to as ESC.
WARNING!
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can they increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The ABS cannot prevent accidents,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of an
ABS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin
of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is
detected, brake pressure is applied to the
slipping wheel(s) to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a limited slip differential
and controls the wheel spin across a driven
axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning
faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow
more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. This feature remains active
even if TCS and ESC are in either the “Partial
Off” or “Full Off” modes. Refer to “Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)” in this section for further
information.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s
braking capability during emergency braking
maneuvers. The system detects an emergency
braking situation by sensing the rate and
amount of brake application and then applies
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best
BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the
system, you must apply continuous braking
pressure during the stopping sequence. Do not
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is
no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is
released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on
the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction
afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
BAS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless
or dangerous manner which could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver
when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill.
HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure
the driver applied for a short period of time after
the driver takes their foot off of the brake pedal.
If the driver does not apply the throttle during
this short period of time, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down
the hill. The system will release brake pressure
209
in proportion to amount of throttle applied as
the vehicle starts to move in the intended
direction of travel.
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward
gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE
gear).
WARNING!
If the clutch pedal (manual transmission only)
remains pressed during the application of the
throttle, the HSA will disengage allowing the
vehicle to roll down the incline. This could
cause a collision with another vehicle or object. To avoid this, do not apply throttle while
pressing the clutch pedal until you are ready
to release the clutch. Always remember the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills (i.e.,
less than 8%), with a loaded vehicle, or while
pulling a trailer where the system will not
activate and slight rolling may occur, which
could cause a collision with another vehicle or
object. Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for
HSA to activate:
The system will only work if the intended direction of the vehicle and vehicle gear match. For
example, if the intended direction is forward up
a hill and the vehicle is in DRIVE (automatic
transmission equipped vehicle), and the activation criteria are met, HSA will activate.
• Vehicle must be stopped
• Vehicle must be on an 8% or greater incline
(3% for manual transmission equipped vehicles)
210
HSA On Automatic Transmission Vehicles
The system will work in REVERSE, and all
forward gears on vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission. The system will not
activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL.
HSA On Manual Transmission Vehicles
The system will work in REVERSE, forward
gears, and NEUTRAL on manual transmission
equipped vehicles. The system does not recognize NEUTRAL on manual vehicles, thus it
will hold the vehicle on an incline for a short
period while in NEUTRAL, regardless of clutch
position. To prevent this, do not attempt to roll
down a hill simply by putting the transmission in
NEUTRAL and letting gravity act on the vehicle,
as the HSA will prevent the vehicle from rolling.
Instead, use the appropriate gear for moving in
the desired direction.
Towing With HSA
HSA will provide assistance when starting on a
grade when pulling a trailer.
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, your trailer brakes may be activated
and deactivated with the brake switch. If so,
when the brake pedal is released there
may not be enough brake pressure to hold
the vehicle and trailer on a hill and this
could cause a collision with another vehicle
or object behind you. In order to avoid
rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake
prior to releasing the brake pedal. Always
remember the driver is responsible for
braking the vehicle.
• HSA is not a parking brake. If you stop the
vehicle on a hill without putting the transmission in PARK and using the parking
brake, it will roll down the hill and could
cause a collision with another vehicle or
object. Always remember to use the parking brake while parking on a hill, and that
the driver is responsible for braking the
vehicle.
NOTE:
The HSA system may also be turned on and
off if the vehicle is equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
HSA Off
If you wish to turn off the HSA system, follow
this procedure:
1. Start with the engine off and vehicle in PARK
(automatic transmission) or NEUTRAL with
clutch out (manual transmission) with wheels
straight. Apply parking brake on manual transmission vehicle.
2. Start the engine.
3. With the engine running, the brake applied,
and the clutch out, rotate the steering wheel
180° counterclockwise from center.
4. Press the ESC OFF switch four times within
twenty seconds.
5. Rotate the steering wheel 360° clockwise
(180° clockwise from center).
6. Cycle ignition switch OFF then ON.
7. If the sequence was completed properly, the
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
will blink several times to confirm HSA is off.
Steps 1-7 must be completed within 90 seconds to turn off HSA. Repeat steps 1-7 to
re-enable HSA functionality.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel
lift by monitoring the driver’s steering wheel
input and the speed of the vehicle. When ERM
determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it applies
the appropriate brake and may reduce engine
power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM will only intervene during very
severe or evasive driving maneuvers.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during
severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It cannot
prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as
road conditions, leaving the roadway or striking
objects or other vehicles.
211
NOTE:
Anytime the ESC system is in the “Full Off”
mode, ERM is disabled. Refer to Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) for a complete explanation of the available ESC modes.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road
conditions and driving conditions, influence
the chance that wheel lift or rollover may
occur. Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) cannot
prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially
those that involve leaving the roadway or
striking objects or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s
safety or the safety of others.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and
stability of the vehicle under various driving
conditions. The ESC corrects for over/under
steering of the vehicle by applying the brake of
212
the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting
the over/under steer condition. Engine power
may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving
to the prevailing road conditions.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine
the vehicle path intended by the driver and
compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.
When the actual path does not match the
intended path, ESC applies the brake of the
appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the
oversteer or understeer condition.
WARNING!
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The ESC cannot prevent accidents,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of an
ESC-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” (located in the instrument cluster), starts
to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and
the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins
to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
The ESC system has three available operating
modes in 4H range. The system has one operating mode in 4L range. Two-wheel drive vehicles and four-wheel drive vehicles in 2H
range have two operating modes.
Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily pressing
the ESC OFF switch.
All other stability features of ESC function normally. This mode is intended to be used if the
vehicle is in deep snow, sand, or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would
normally allow is required to gain traction. To
turn ESC on again, momentarily press the ESC
OFF switch. This will restore the normal “ESC
On” mode of operation.
ESC OFF Switch
NOTE:
To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving with snow chains, or starting off in deep
snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to
switch to the “Partial Off” mode by pressing
the ESC OFF switch. Once the situation
requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial
Off” mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by
momentarily pressing the ESC OFF switch.
This may be done while the vehicle is in
motion.
4H Range (4WD Models) or 2WD Models
On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC in
4H and 2WD vehicles.
When in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode, the TCS portion of
ESC has been disabled and the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will be
illuminated.
WARNING!
With the ESC switched off, the enhanced
vehicle stability offered by ESC and ERM are
unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC and ERM systems will not engage to assist in maintaining stability. The
“Full Off” ESC mode is intended for off-road
use only.
4L Range (4WD Models)
ESC Off
This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 4L
range. Whenever the vehicle is started in 4L
range, or the transfer case (if equipped) is
shifted from 4H range or NEUTRAL to 4L range,
the ESC system will be in this mode. In 4L
range, ESC and TCS, except for the “limited
slip” feature described in the TCS section, are
turned off until the vehicle reaches a speed of
40 mph (64 km/h). At 40 mph (64 km/h), the
normal ESC stability function returns but TCS
remains off. When the vehicle speed drops
below 35 mph (56 km/h), the ESC system shuts
off. The ESC is off at low vehicle speeds in 4L
range so that it will not interfere with off-road
213
driving, but the ESC function returns to provide
the stability feature at speeds above 40 mph
(64 km/h). The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will always be illuminated in 4L
range when ESC is off.
NOTE:
The “ESC OFF” message will display and
the audible chime will sound when the shift
lever is placed in the PARK position from
any position other than PARK, and then
moved out of the PARK position. This will
occur even if the message was previously
cleared.
WARNING!
With the ESC switched off, the enhanced
vehicle stability offered by ESC and ERM are
unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC and ERM systems will not engage to assist in maintaining stability. The
“Full Off” mode is intended for off-road use
only.
Disabling ESC For Modified Vehicles (4WD
Models Only)
Vehicles modified with larger tires and/or suspension lifts may experience early ESC activations as compared to a non-modified production vehicle depending on lift size, tire size,
suspension changes and/or driving habits. If
early ESC activations are experienced while
driving a modified vehicle, the additional ability
to permanently turn off ESC is available. A
steering wheel/ESC button maneuver must be
performed to permanently disable ESC and
defeat the functionality of the ESC switch. Repeating the procedure will return the system to
normal ESC operation and restore ESC switch
functionality allowing ESC “Partial” or “Off”
modes.
WARNING!
With ESC in the permanent disable mode,
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC
and ERM systems is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC and ERM
systems will not engage to assist in maintaining stability. This disabled mode is intended
for off-highway or off-road use only. Vehicle
modifications requiring the owner to configure
the vehicle in the ESC disabled mode, will
seriously affect the vehicle’s roadworthiness
and safety and may lead to loss of control
and/or accident resulting in possible serious
or fatal injuries.
The following procedure will disable (or reenable) ESC functionality in the vehicle:
1. Shift the transfer case into the 4H range
position.
2. Turn the steering wheel until it is centered
and the wheels are pointed straight ahead.
3. Cycle the ignition key OFF to ON.
214
4. Wait approximately five seconds for the system bulb check.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light and ESC OFF Indicator Light
5. Turn and hold the steering wheel one-half
turn to the right (clockwise).
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” in the instrument
cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should go out with the
engine running. If the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes
on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several
ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized
dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
6. Press and hold the ESC OFF button for
seven seconds.
7. Turn the steering wheel back to center, and
turn and hold an additional one-half turn to the
left (counterclockwise).
8. Press and hold the ESC OFF button for
seven seconds.
9. Turn the steering wheel back to center.
10. Press and hold the ESC OFF button for
seven seconds.
11. Cycle the ignition key to OFF.
After performing the ESC disable procedure
correctly, “ESC OFF” will be displayed in the
odometer for approximately 12 seconds each
time the ignition is moved to ON. Repeating the
ESC disable procedure will re-enable normal
ESC operation.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts
to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and
the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins
to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving
to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” and the “ESC OFF Indicator
Light” come on momentarily each time
the ignition switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the
ESC system will be ON even if it was
turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or
clicking sounds when it is active. This is
normal; the sounds will stop when ESC
becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) is off.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize
an excessively swaying trailer and will take the
215
appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway.
The system may reduce engine power and
apply the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to
counteract the sway of the trailer. TSC will
become active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized. No driver
action is required. Note that TSC cannot stop all
trailers from swaying. Always use caution when
towing a trailer and follow the tongue weight
recommendations. Refer to “Trailer Towing” in
“Starting and Operating” for further information.
When TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power may be reduced and you may feel
the brakes being applied to individual wheels
to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC
is disabled when the ESP system is in the
“Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and
adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
216
Hill Descent Control (HDC) – If
Equipped
Gear
HDC is only intended for low speed off-road
driving. HDC maintains vehicle speed while
descending hills in off-road driving conditions
by applying the brakes when necessary.
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
DRIVE
REVERSE
The symbol indicates the status of
the Hill Descent Control (HDC) feature. The lamp will be on solid
when HDC is armed. HDC can
only be armed when the transfer
case is in the “4WD LOW” position
and the vehicle speed is less then 30 mph
(48 km/h). If these conditions are not met while
attempting to use the HDC feature, the HDC
indicator light will flash on/off.
When enabled, HDC senses the terrain and
activates when the vehicle is descending a hill.
HDC speed may be adjusted by the driver to
suit the driving conditions. The speed corresponds to the transmission gear selected.
Approximate HDC
Set Speed
1 mph (1.5 km/h)
2.5 mph (4 km/h)
4 mph (6.5 km/h)
5.5 mph (9 km/h)
7.5 mph (12 km/h)
1 mph (1.5 km/h)
However, the driver can override HDC operation by applying the brake to slow the vehicle
down below the HDC control speed. If more
speed is desired during HDC control, the accelerator pedal will increase vehicle speed in
the usual manner. When either the brake or the
accelerator is released, HDC will control the
vehicle at the original set speed.
Enabling HDC
1. Shift the transfer case into 4WD LOW range.
Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
2. Press the “Hill Descent” button. The “Hill
Descent Control Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will turn on solid.
NOTE:
If the transfer case is not in 4WD LOW range,
the “Hill Descent Control Indicator Light”
will flash for five seconds and HDC will not
be enabled.
Disabling HDC
1. Press the “Hill Descent” button or shift the
transfer case out of 4WD LOW range. The “Hill
Descent Control Indicator” light in the instrument cluster will turn off.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Three primary areas are affected by improper
tire pressure:
Safety
WARNING!
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and
can result in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to
cushion shock. Objects on the road and
chuck holes can cause damage that results
in tire failure.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your
vehicle.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly,
resulting in loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle
to drift to the right or left.
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven
wear patterns to develop across the tire tread.
These abnormal wear patterns will reduce
tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire
replacement. Under-inflation also increases tire
rolling resistance and results in higher fuel
consumption.
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable
ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
Tire pressure should be checked and adjusted
as well as inspected for signs of tire wear or
visible damage, at least once a month. Use a
good quality pocket-type gauge to check tire
pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires
may look properly inflated even when they are
under-inflated.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Sensor.
217
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are
always “cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after a three-hour period. The cold tire inflation
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire side wall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
(7 kPa) per 12° F (7° C) of air temperature
change. Keep this in mind when checking tire
pressure inside a garage, especially in the
Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68° F (20° C)
and the outside temperature = 32° F (0° C) then
the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12° F (7° C) for this outside
temperature condition.
218
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13
to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce
this normal pressure buildup or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High-Speed
Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
speeds within posted speed limits. Where
speed limits or conditions are such that the
vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high-speed
vehicle operation. Refer to original equipment
or an authorized tire dealer for recommended
safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire
inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have
a serious accident. Do not drive a vehicle
loaded to maximum capacity at continuous
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial-Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of
tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to
handle poorly. The instability could cause an
accident. Always use radial tires in sets of
four. Never combine them with other types of
tires.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable
only in the tread area because of sidewall
flexing. Consult your authorized dealer for radial tire repairs.
Tire Spinning
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced
after six years, regardless of the remaining
tread. Failure to follow this warning can result
in sudden tire failure. You could lose control
and have an accident resulting in serious
injury or death.
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not spin your vehicle’s wheels above
30 mph (48 km/h).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your
vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
when you are stuck, and do not let anyone
near a spinning wheel no matter what the
speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your
tires should be replaced.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible. Protect
tires from contact with oil, grease and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
These indicators are molded into the bottom of
the tread grooves. They will appear as bands
when the tread depth becomes 1/16 in (2 mm).
When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including but not limited to:
• Driving style
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance
of many characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire
inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly
recommends that you use tires equivalent to
the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed (see the paragraph on tread wear indicators). Refer to the
Tire and Loading Information placard for the
size designation of your tire. The service description and load identification will be found
on the original equipment tire. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely
219
affect the safety, handling, and ride of your
vehicle. We recommend that you refer to your
original equipment or contact an authorized tire
dealer with any questions you may have on tire
specifications or capability.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other
than that specified for your vehicle. Some
combinations of unapproved tires and
wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling,
and braking of your vehicle. This can cause
unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could
lose control and have an accident resulting
in serious injury or death. Use only the tire
and wheel sizes with load ratings approved
for your vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with
a smaller load index could result in tire
overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have an accident.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires
having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle
control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different
size may result in false speedometer and
odometer readings.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation
of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially
worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such
as those on On/Off Road type tires. Rotation will
increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow,
and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the
proper maintenance intervals. More frequent
rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons
for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “forwardcross” shown in the following diagram.
TIRE ROTATION
RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles
operate at different loads and perform different
steering, handling, and braking functions. For
these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
Tire Rotation
220
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM
(TPMS)
including low temperature effects, or natural
pressure loss through the tire.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based
on the vehicle recommended cold placard
pressure.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists,
and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or
above recommended cold placard pressure.
Once the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” has been illuminated, the tire pressure
must be increased to the recommended cold
placard pressure in order for the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” to be turned OFF. The
system will automatically update and the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have
been received. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) to receive this information.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
about 1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C).
This means that when the outside temperature
decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire
pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for
more than three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three-hour period. Refer
to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting
and Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire
pressure will also increase as the vehicle is
driven; this is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low
pressure warning threshold for any reason,
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold (parked for more than three
hours) air pressure of 35 psi (241 kPa). If the
ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the
measured tire pressure is 30 psi (207 kPa), a
temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease
the tire pressure to approximately 26 psi
(179 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low
enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle may
cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately
30 psi (207 kPa), but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will still be ON. In this
situation, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will turn OFF only after the tires have
been inflated to the vehicle’s recommended
cold placard pressure value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the
original equipment tires and wheels. The
TPMS pressures have been established for
the tire size equipped on your vehicle.
Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same
size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels
can cause sensor damage. Do not use
aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads
if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as
damage to the sensors may result.
(Continued)
221
CAUTION! (Continued)
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap.
This will prevent moisture and dirt from
entering the valve stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance, nor to
provide warning of a tire failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire
pressure gauge while adjusting your tire
pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not
222
reached the level to trigger illumination of
the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light.”
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect
tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor
the actual tire pressure in the tire.
Base System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses
wireless technology with wheel rim mounted
electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of
the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings
to the Receiver Module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check
the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
A tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in
the spare wheel if the vehicle is equipped with
a matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly. The matching full size spare tire can be
used in place of any of the four road tires. A low
spare tire will not cause the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” to illuminate or the
chime to sound.
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will illuminate in the instrument
cluster, a “LOW TIRE” message will be
displayed for a minimum of five seconds and an audible chime will be activated
when one or more of the four active road tire
pressures are low. Should this occur, you
should stop as soon as possible, check the
inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle,
and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value. The system will automatically update and the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” and “LOW
TIRE” message will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this
information.
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
flash on and off for 75 seconds, and will remain
on solid when a system fault is detected. The
system fault will also sound a chime. If the
ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. A system
fault can occur by any of the following scenarios:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio
Frequencies as the TPM sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window
tinting that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM
sensors.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle is equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire assem-
bly, it has a tire pressure monitoring sensor, and can be monitored by the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). In
the event that the matching full size spare
tire is swapped with a low pressure road
tire, the next ignition key cycle will still
show the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to be ON, a “LOW TIRE” message displayed for a minimum of five
seconds and a chime to sound. Driving
the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) will turn OFF the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” and
“LOW TIRE” message as long as none of
the road tires are below the low pressure
warning threshold.
• If your vehicle is not equipped with a
matching full size spare wheel and tire
assembly, it does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor in the spare tire. The
TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire
pressure. If you install the spare tire in
place of a road tire that has a pressure
below the low-pressure warning limit,
upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime
will sound and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” and “LOW TIRE”
message will turn ON. After driving the
vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid. For
each subsequent ignition key cycle, a
chime will sound and the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and reinstall it on the vehicle
in place of the spare tire, the TPMS will
update automatically and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn
OFF, as long as no tire pressure is below
the low-pressure warning limit in any of
the four active road tires. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
223
FUEL REQUIREMENTS —
GASOLINE ENGINES
This engine is designed to meet all emissions
regulations and provide excellent fuel economy
and performance when using high quality unleaded gasoline with a minimum research octane rating of 91. The use of premium gasoline
is not recommended, as it will not provide any
benefit over regular gasoline in these engines.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not
harmful to your engine. However, continued
heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause
damage, and immediate service is required.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand
of gasoline before considering service for the
vehicle.
Over 40 auto manufacturer’s worldwide have
issued and endorsed consistent gasoline
specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter,
WWFC) which define fuel properties necessary
to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufac-
224
turer recommends the use of gasoline that
meets the WWFC specifications if they are
available.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling and stumble. If you
experience these problems, try another brand
of gasoline before considering service for the
vehicle.
Methanol
(Methyl or Wood Alcohol) is used in a variety of
concentrations when blended with unleaded
gasoline. You may find fuels containing 3% or
more methanol along with other alcohols called
cosolvents. Problems that result from using
methanol/gasoline or E85 Ethanol blends are
not the responsibility of the manufacturer. While
MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol, it
does not have the negative effects of Methanol.
CAUTION!
Do not use gasolines containing Methanol or
E85 Ethanol. Use of these blends may result
in starting and driveability problems and may
damage critical fuel system components.
Ethanol
The manufacturer recommends that your vehicle be operated on fuel containing no more
than 10% ethanol. Purchasing your fuel from a
reputable supplier may reduce the risk of exceeding this 10% limit and/or of receiving fuel
with abnormal properties. It should also be
noted that an increase in fuel consumption
should be expected when using ethanolblended fuels, due to the lower energy content
of ethanol.
Problems that result from using methanol/
gasoline or E85 Ethanol blends are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer. While MTBE
is an oxygenate made from Methanol, it does
not have the negative effects of Methanol.
CAUTION!
Use of fuel with ethanol content higher than
10% may result in engine malfunction, starting
and operating difficulties and materials degradation. These adverse effects could result in
permanent damage to your vehicle.
Clean Air Gasoline
Materials Added to Fuel
Many gasolines are now being blended that
contribute to cleaner air, especially in those
areas where air pollution levels are high. These
new blends provide a cleaner burning fuel and
some are referred to as “reformulated gasoline.”
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the
proper octane rating, gasolines that contain
detergents, corrosion and stability additives
are recommended. Using gasolines that have
these additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
The manufacturer supports these efforts toward
cleaner air. You can help by using these blends
as they become available.
MMT in Gasoline
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to
increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT
provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces
spark plug life and reduces emission system
performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT
be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of
gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline
pump; therefore, you should ask your gasoline
retailer whether or not his/her gasoline contains
MMT.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning
agents should be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and varnish removal
may contain active solvents or similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and
diaphragm materials.
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless
gas which can kill. Never run the engine in
a closed area, such as a garage, and never
sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running for an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the
engine running for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to force
fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with
proper maintenance. Have the exhaust
system inspected every time the vehicle is
raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
• Keep the swing gate closed when driving
your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide
and other poisonous exhaust gases from
entering the vehicle.
225
FUEL REQUIREMENTS — DIESEL
ENGINES
Use Premium Quality Diesel fuels with a Cetane
rating of 50 or higher, and meeting the EN590
standard are highly recommended. See your
authorized dealer for further information regarding fuels available in your area.
ADDING FUEL
Locking Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The locking gas cap is located on the driver’s
side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or
damaged, be sure the replacement cap is the
correct one for this vehicle.
Fuel Filler Cap
226
1. Turn off engine.
2. Insert the ignition key into the fuel cap and
turn the key one-quarter turn to the right, then
rotate the fuel cap to the left to remove.
3. Rotate the ignition key back to the left to
remove.
4. To replace the cap, insert it into the filler
neck and tighten to the right until at least three
clicks are heard.
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emissions
control system could result from using an
improper fuel tank filler tube cap (gas cap).
• A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities
into the fuel system.
• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to turn on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
“top off” the fuel tank after filling. When the
fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
WARNING!
• Remove the fuel tank filler tube cap (gas
cap) slowly to prevent fuel spray from the
filler neck, which may cause injury.
• The volatility of some gasolines may cause
a buildup of pressure in the fuel tank that
may increase while you drive. This pressure can result in a spray of gasoline and/or
vapors when the cap is removed from a hot
vehicle. Removing the cap slowly allows
the pressure to vent and prevents fuel
spray.
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is being filled.
• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the
engine is running.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into
a portable container that is inside of a
vehicle. You could be burned. Always place
gas containers on the ground while filling.
NOTE:
• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a
“clicking” sound. This is an indication
that the gas cap is tightened properly. The
MIL in the instrument cluster may turn on
if the gas cap is not secured properly.
Make sure that the gas cap is tightened
each time the vehicle is refueled.
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off,
the fuel tank is full.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message (gASCAP)
After fuel has been added, the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is
possibly loose, improperly installed, or damaged. If the system detects a malfunction, the
“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer display. Tighten the gas cap until a ⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard. This is an indication that
the gas cap is properly tightened. Press the
odometer reset button to turn the message off.
If the problem persists, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started. This
might indicate a damaged cap. If the problem
is detected twice in a row, the system will turn
on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section, you will find safety tips and
information on limits to the type of towing you
can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before
towing a trailer, carefully review this information
to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer
towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions
will assist you in understanding the following
information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle. This includes driver, passengers,
cargo and tongue weight. The total load must
be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the
weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on
the trailer in its ⬙loaded and ready for operation⬙
condition. The recommended way to measure
GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a
vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer
must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of
your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination.
NOTE:
The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg)
allowance for the presence of a driver.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do
not exceed either front or rear GAWR.
227
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
driving condition can result if either rating is
exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer. In most
cases, it should not be less than 7% or more
than 10% of the trailer load. Tongue weight
must not exceed the lesser of either the hitch
certification rating, or the trailer tongue chassis
rating. It should never be less than 4% of the
trailer load, and not less than 55 lbs (25 kg).
You must consider tongue load as part of the
load on your vehicle and its GAWR.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted hitch system may
reduce handling, stability and braking performance and could result in an accident. Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or
a reputable trailer/caravan dealer for additional information.
• For detachable tow bar, pass the cable
through the attachment point and clip it back
onto itself.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a
trailer.
Breakaway Cable Attachment
European braking regulations for braked trailers up to 7,700 lbs (3 500 kg) require trailers to
be fitted with either a secondary coupling or
breakaway cable.
The recommended location for attaching the
normal trailer’s breakaway cable is in the
stamped slot located on the sidewall of the
hitch receiver.
228
With Attachment Point
Detachable Ball Clip Loop Method
• For fixed ball tow bar, attach the clip directly
to the designated point. This alternative must
be specifically permitted by the trailer manufacturer since the clip may not be sufficiently
strong for use in this way.
Without Attachment Points
• For detachable ball tow bar, you must follow
the recommended manufacturer or supplier
procedure.
• For fixed ball tow bar, loop the cable around
the neck of the tow ball. If you fit the cable
like this, use a single loop only.
Fixed Ball Neck Loop Method
Fixed Ball Clip Loop Method
Detachable Ball Neck Loop Method
229
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/Transmission
Model
Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.)
Max. Tongue Wt. (See Note)
All
Two-Door
4,409 lbs (2 000 kg)
220 lbs (100 kg)
All
Four-Door
7,716 lbs (3 500 kg)
308 lbs (140 kg)
Maximum trailer towing speed is limited to 62 mph (100 km/h) unless local laws require a lower speed.
NOTE:
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of
occupants and cargo, and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and
Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tires
– General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in
the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely
side to side which will cause loss of control of
the vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers
heavier in front is the cause of many trailer
accidents.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight
stamped on your trailer hitch.
230
Consider the following items when computing
the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or
equipment put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also,
additional factory-installed options, or
dealer-installed options, must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the Tire and Loading Information
placard, located on the drivers door pillar,
for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle
drivetrain components, the following guidelines
are recommended:
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is
driven. The engine, axle or other parts
could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km)
that a trailer is towed, do not drive over
50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts at
full throttle. This helps the engine and other
parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier
loads.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident. Follow these guidelines to make your
trailer towing as safe as possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the
trailer and will not shift during travel. When
trailering cargo that is not fully secured,
dynamic load shifts can occur that may be
difficult for the driver to control. You could
lose control of your vehicle and have an
accident.
• All trailer hitches should be professionally
installed on your vehicle.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do
not overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a loss of control, poor
performance or damage to the brakes,
axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure or tires.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains
under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked
on a grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow
vehicle automatic transmission in PARK.
Always, block or ⬙chock⬙ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer
such that the following four ratings are
not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch
utilized.
Towing Requirements – Tires
− Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a
compact spare tire.
− Proper tire inflation pressures are essential
for the safe and satisfactory operation of
your vehicle. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for
proper tire inflation procedures.
− Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
− Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire
damage before towing a trailer. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and
Operating” for the proper inspection procedure.
− When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating”
for proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying
capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limits.
231
Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes
− Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with
that of the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury.
− When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an
electronic brake controller is not required.
− Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers
over 1,000 lbs (450 kg) and required for
trailers in excess of 1,653 lbs (750 kg).
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs
(450 kg) loaded, it should have its own brakes
and they should be of adequate capacity.
Failure to do this could lead to accelerated
brake lining wear, higher brake pedal effort,
and longer stopping distances.
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydraulic brake lines. It can overload
your brake system and cause it to fail. You
might not have brakes when you need
them and could have an accident.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance. When towing, you should
allow for additional space between your
vehicle and the vehicle in front of you.
Failure to do so could result in an accident.
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. However, if frequent shifting occurs while in
this range, the “O/D OFF” mode should be
selected.
NOTE:
Using the “O/D OFF” mode while operating
the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend
transmission life by reducing excessive
shifting and heat build up. This action will
also provide better engine braking.
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning,
stopping and backing the trailer in an area
away from heavy traffic.
The automatic transmission fluid and filter
should be changed if you REGULARLY tow a
trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous
operation. Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for
transmission fluid change intervals.
Manual Transmission – If Equipped
If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer
towing, all starts must be in FIRST gear to avoid
excessive clutch slippage.
NOTE:
Check the automatic transmission fluid level
before towing.
Towing Tips
O/D Off – If Equipped
To reduce the potential for automatic transmission overheating, select “O/D OFF” when driving in hilly areas or shift the transmission to
232
DRIVE position 2 on more severe grades. Refer
to “Automatic Transmission” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information.
Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped
− Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
− When using the speed control, if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), disengage until you can get back
to cruising speed.
− Use speed control in flat terrain and with light
loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission
overheating, take the following actions:
− Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
Trailer Hitch Attaching Points
Your vehicle will require extra equipment to tow
a trailer safely and efficiently. The trailer tow
hitch must be attached to your vehicle using
the provided attaching points on the vehicle’s
frame. Refer to the following chart to determine
the accurate attaching points. Other equipment, such as trailer sway controls and braking
equipment, trailer equalizing (leveling) equipment and low profile mirrors, may also be
required or strongly recommended.
Trailer Tow Hitch Attaching Points And
Overhang Dimensions
A
N/A
B
N/A
C
N/A
D (maximum over2.47 ft. (754 mm)
hang)
E
3.39 ft. (1032 mm)
F
0.16 ft. (50 mm)
G
0.46 ft. (140 mm)
− City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, shift
the transmission into NEUTRAL and increase
engine idle speed.
− Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
233
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition
Wheels OFF the Ground
Four-Wheel Drive Models
See Instructions
• Automatic transmission in PARK
Flat Tow
NONE
• Manual transmission in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL (N)
• Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)
• Tow in forward direction
Dolly Tow
On Trailer
Recreational Towing – Four-Wheel
Drive Models
NOTE:
The transfer case must be shifted into N
(Neutral), automatic transmission must be
shifted into PARK, and manual transmission
must be placed in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL)
for recreational towing.
Front
Rear
ALL
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
CAUTION!
• Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used.
Internal damage to the transmission or
transfer case will occur if a front or rear
wheel lift is used when recreational towing.
• Tow only in the forward direction. Towing
this vehicle backwards can cause severe
damage to the transfer case.
(Continued)
234
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Automatic transmissions must be placed in
the PARK position for recreational towing.
• Manual transmissions must be placed in
gear (not in Neutral) for recreational towing.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Before recreational towing, perform the
procedure outlined under “Shifting Into
NEUTRAL” to be certain that the transfer
case is fully in NEUTRAL. Otherwise, internal damage will result.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission and/or transfer case damage. Damage
from improper towing is not covered under
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on
tow bar on your vehicle. The bumper face
bar will be damaged.
Shifting Into Neutral (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for recreational towing.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in
the N (Neutral) position without first fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer case N
(Neutral) position disengages both the front
and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and
will allow the vehicle to move, even if the
transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be
certain that the transfer case is fully in N
(Neutral) before recreational towing to prevent
damage to internal parts.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
4. Shift the automatic transmission into NEUTRAL or depress the clutch pedal on a manual
transmission.
5. Shift the transfer case lever into N (Neutral).
6. Start the engine.
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
8. Release the brake pedal (and clutch pedal
on manual transmissions) for five seconds and
ensure that there is no vehicle movement.
9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 with automatic transmission in DRIVE or manual transmission in first
gear.
10. Turn OFF the engine and leave the ignition
switch in the unlocked OFF position.
11. Firmly apply the parking brake.
12. Shift the transmission into PARK or place
manual transmission in gear (NOT in Neutral).
2. Turn OFF the engine.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal.
235
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
transmission is shifted into PARK with the
transfer case in N (Neutral) and the engine
running. With the transfer case in N (Neutral)
ensure that the engine is OFF prior to shifting
the transmission into PARK.
4. Turn the ignition key/fob to the LOCK/OFF
position (if it has been moved or the engine has
been started).
5. Turn the ignition key/fob to the ON/RUN
position, but do not start the engine.
6. Press and hold the brake pedal.
7. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
13. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using
a suitable tow bar.
8. Shift the transfer case lever to the desired
position.
14. Release the parking brake.
15. Disconnect the negative battery cable, and
secure it away from the negative battery post.
NOTE:
When shifting out of transfer case N (Neutral), turning the engine OFF may be required to avoid gear clash.
Shifting Out of Neutral (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for normal usage.
9. Shift the automatic transmission into PARK,
or place manual transmission in Neutral.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving
it connected to the tow vehicle.
11. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
10. Release the brake pedal.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
12. Start the engine.
3. Reconnect the negative battery cable.
13. Press and hold the brake pedal.
14. Release the parking brake.
236
15. Shift the transmission into gear, release the
brake pedal (and clutch pedal on manual
transmissions), and check that the vehicle operates normally.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
• HAZARD WARNING FLASHER . . . . . .
• IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . .
• JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . .
• Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . .
• Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . .
• Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . .
• JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . .
• Preparations for Jump-Start . . . . . .
• Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . .
• TOW EYES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . .
• TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . .
• Towing Without The Ignition Key Fob
• Four–Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
238
238
239
239
239
239
240
242
242
243
244
244
245
246
246
237
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located
on the instrument panel below the climate
controls.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard
Warning flasher. When the switch is
activated, all directional turn signals will
flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a
second time to turn off the Hazard Warning
flasher.
This is an emergency warning system and it
should not be used when the vehicle is in
motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled
and it is creating a safety hazard for other
motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the Hazard Warning flasher will continue
to operate even though the ignition is placed in
the OFF position.
238
NOTE:
With extended use the Hazard Warning
flasher may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can
reduce the potential for overheating by taking
the appropriate action.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, shift transmission into NEUTRAL, but do not increase
engine idle speed.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
reads HOT (H), pull over and stop the vehicle.
Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned
off until the pointer drops back into the normal
range. If the pointer remains on HOT (H), and
you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine
off immediately, and call for service.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow
down an impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it
off. The A/C system adds heat to the
engine cooling system and turning the
A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control
to maximum heat, the mode control to
floor and the blower control to high. This
allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing
heat from the engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming
from under the hood, do not open the hood
until the radiator has had time to cool. Never
try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side
of the vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far
enough off the road to avoid the danger of
being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack and
fall on you. You could be crushed. Never
put any part of your body under a vehicle
that is on a jack.
• Never start or run the engine while the
vehicle is on a jack. If you need to get under
a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• The jack is designed to use as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be
used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location
The jack and lug wrench are located in the rear
storage compartment.
NOTE:
If you have added aftermarket accessories
to the spare tire mounted carrier, it cannot
exceed a gross weight of 50 lbs (23 kg)
including the weight of the spare tire.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
Jack Storage
Spare Tire Stowage
To remove the spare tire from the carrier, remove the tire cover, if equipped, and remove
the lug nuts with the lug wrench turning them
counterclockwise.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Shift the automatic transmission into PARK,
or a manual transmission into REVERSE.
5. Turn the ignition to LOCK.
239
6. Block both the front
and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite of
the jacking position. For
example, if changing
the right front tire, block
the left rear wheel.
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings
to help prevent personal injury or damage to
your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far
from the edge of the roadway as possible
before raising the vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
(Continued)
240
WARNING! (Continued)
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the
wheel to be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an
automatic transmission in PARK; a manual
transmission in REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the
vehicle on a jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it
is on a jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated
and for lifting this vehicle during a tire
change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated,
are securely stowed, spares must be
stowed with the valve stem facing the
ground.
Jack Warning Label
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking
on locations other than those indicated in the
Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack and tools from
the stored location.
2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug
nuts by turning them to the left one turn while
the wheel is still on the ground.
3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools. Connect the jack handle driver to the extension,
then to the lug wrench.
4. Operate the jack from the front or the rear of
the vehicle. Place the jack under the axle tube,
as shown. Do not raise the vehicle until you
are sure the jack is fully engaged.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
make the vehicle less stable and cause a
collision. It could slip off the jack and hurt
someone near it. Raise the vehicle only
enough to remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
Jacking Locations
1 — Rear Jacking Location
2 — Front Jacking Location
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw
to the right. Raise the vehicle only until the tire
just clears the surface and enough clearance is
obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire
lift provides maximum stability.
7. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle
and install the lug nuts with the cone-shaped
end toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug
nuts clockwise.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered.
8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw
to the left, and remove the jack.
9. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on
the wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alternate nuts until each nut has been
tightened twice. The correct wheel nut tightness is 95 ft lbs (130 N·m). If in doubt about the
correct tightness, have them checked with a
torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a
service station.
10. Remove the jack assembly and wheel
blocks.
11. Secure the tire, jack, and tools in their
proper locations.
12. Remove blocks from wheels.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack, thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop, could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack
parts and the spare tire in the places provided.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the
Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
241
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
Preparations for Jump-Start
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can
be jump-started using a set of jumper cables
and a battery in another vehicle or by using a
portable battery booster pack. Jump-starting
can be dangerous if done improperly so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
The battery in your vehicle is located in the right
rear of the engine compartment, behind the
Power Distribution Center.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or
any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the
battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical
system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
242
WARNING! (Continued)
• Remove any metal jewelry such as watch
bands or bracelets that might make an
inadvertent electrical contact. You could be
seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn
your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen
gas which is flammable and explosive.
Keep open flames or sparks away from the
battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic
transmission into PARK and turn the ignition to
LOCK.
Positive Battery Post
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is on. You can
be injured by moving fan blades.
(Continued)
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cables reach, set the parking brake and make
sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as
this could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could result in
personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result
in damage to the charging system of the
booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the
booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper
cable to the negative (-) post of the booster
battery.
7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the
jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the
booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of the discharged vehicle’s
engine) away from the battery and the fuel
injection system.
8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive
(+) jumper cable from the positive (+) post of
the booster battery.
WARNING!
Do not connect the cable to the negative post
(-) of the discharged battery. The resulting
electrical spark could cause the battery to
explode and could result in personal injury.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start the engine in the vehicle
with the discharged battery.
Once the engine is started, remove the jumper
cables in the reverse sequence:
6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable
from the engine ground of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the
discharged vehicle.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your
vehicle you should have the battery and charging system inspected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories that can be plugged into the
vehicle power outlets draw power from the
vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in
long enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
243
TOW EYES
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
Your vehicle is equipped with tow eyes, which
are mounted in the front and the rear.
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever
cannot be moved out of the PARK position, you
can use the following procedure to temporarily
move the shift lever:
CAUTION!
Tow eyes are for emergency use only, to
rescue a vehicle stranded off road. Do not use
tow eyes for tow truck hookup or highway
towing. You could damage your vehicle. Tow
straps are recommended when towing the
vehicle; chains may cause vehicle damage.
5. Using the screwdriver or similar tool, reach
into the opening and press and hold the shift
lever override.
1. Firmly set the parking brake.
6. Move the shift lever into NEUTRAL.
2. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN position
without starting the engine.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
3. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, carefully
remove the shift lever override access cover, is
located on the PRNDL bezel.
8. Reinstall the shift lever override access
cover.
WARNING!
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
eyes. Tow straps and chains may break, causing serious injury.
Shift Lever Override Access Cover
244
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the
brake pedal.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial wrecker service. If the transmission and drivetrain are operable,
disabled vehicles may also be towed as described under “Recreational Towing” in the “Starting and Operating” section.
Towing Condition
Wheels OFF the Ground
4WD MODELS
See instructions under “Recreational Towing”
• Auto Trans in PARK
• Manual Trans in gear ( NOT in Neutral)
Flat Tow
NONE
• T/case in NEUTRAL
• Tow in forward direction
Front
NO
Wheel Lift or Dolly Tow
Rear
NO
Flat Bed
ALL
BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow
bars and other equipment designed for the
purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s
instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory.
Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main
structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or associated brackets. State and local
laws applying to vehicles under tow must be
observed.
If the vehicle’s battery is discharged, see
“Brake/Transmission Interlock Manual Override” under “Automatic Transmission” in the
“Starting and Operating” section for instructions on shifting the automatic transmission out
of the PARK position for towing
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition
must be in the ON/RUN position, not the ACC
position.
CAUTION!
• Do not attempt to use sling type equipment
when towing. When securing the vehicle to
a flat bed truck, do not attach to front or rear
suspension components. Damage to your
vehicle may result from improper towing.
• If the vehicle being towed requires steering.
the ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN
or ACC position, not the LOCK position.
245
Towing Without The Ignition Key
Fob
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is
towed with the ignition in the LOCK position.
The only approved method of towing without
the ignition key is with a flatbed truck. Proper
towing equipment is necessary to prevent
damage to the vehicle.
Four–Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing with all
wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable methods
are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one
end of vehicle raised and the opposite end on
a towing dolly
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the
transfer case is operable, the vehicle may be
towed (in the forward direction, with ALL
wheels on the ground), IF the transfer case is in
NEUTRAL and the transmission is in PARK (for
automatic transmissions) or in gear ( NOT in
Neutral, for manual transmissions). Refer to
“Recreational Towing” in “Starting and Operating” for detailed instructions
246
CAUTION!
• Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used.
Internal damage to the transmission or
transfer case will occur if a front or rear
wheel lift is used when towing.
• Failure to follow these towing methods
could result in damage to the transmission
and/or transfer case. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.8L . . . . . . .
• ENGINE COMPARTMENT – 2.8L DIESEL . .
• ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
• Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . .
• REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . .
• MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . .
• Engine Oil – Gasoline Engine . . . . . . .
• Engine Oil – Diesel Engine . . . . . . . .
• Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . .
• Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . .
• Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . .
• Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . .
• Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
249
250
251
251
251
251
252
253
254
254
254
255
255
256
256
256
247
• Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Automatic Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . .
• Hydraulic Clutch Fluid – Manual Transmission . .
• Manual Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . . . .
• Transfer Case – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Front/Rear Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion
• FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Totally Integrated Power Module . . . . . . . . . .
• VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS . . . .
• Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
248
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
257
260
262
263
263
263
264
264
268
268
271
272
273
274
274
275
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.8L
1
2
3
4
5
6
— Integrated Power Module
— Battery
— Automatic Transmission Dipstick
— Engine Oil Dipstick
— Brake Fluid Reservoir
— Washer Fluid Reservoir
7 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
8 — Engine Oil Fill
9 — Air Cleaner Filter
10 — Coolant Pressure Cap
11 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
249
ENGINE COMPARTMENT – 2.8L DIESEL
1
2
3
4
5
— Integrated Power Module
— Battery
— Automatic Transmission Dipstick
— Engine Oil Fill
— Engine Coolant Reservoir
250
6 — Brake Fluid Reservoir
7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
9 — Air Cleaner Filter
10 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM —
OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
onboard diagnostic system called OBD II. This
system monitors the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as
engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the
OBD II system will turn on the “Malfunction
Indicator Light” (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your
service technician in making repairs. Although
your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for
service as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could
cause further damage to the emission control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and drivability. The vehicle must
be serviced before any emissions tests can
be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is
running, severe catalytic converter damage
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
is detected twice in a row, the system will turn
on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the
MIL off.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR姞 parts for normal/
scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly
recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures caused by the use
of non-MOPAR姞 parts for maintenance and
repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s warranty.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is
possibly loose, improperly installed, or damaged. A “gASCAP” message will be displayed
in the odometer. Tighten the gas cap until a
⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard. This is an indication
that the gas cap is properly tightened. Press
the odometer reset button to turn the message
off. If the problem persists, the message will
appear the next time the vehicle is started. This
might indicate a damaged cap. If the problem
The pages that follow contain the required
maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in
the fixed maintenance schedule, there are
other components which may require servicing
or replacement in the future.
251
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or
perform repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs,
damage to other components or negatively
impact vehicle performance. Immediately
have potential malfunctions examined by
an authorized dealership or qualified repair
center.
• Your vehicle has been built with improved
fluids that protect the performance and
durability of your vehicle and also allow
extended maintenance intervals. Do not
use chemical flushes in these components
as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, power steering or air conditioning. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is
needed because of component malfunction, use only the specified fluid for the
flushing procedure.
252
Engine Oil – Gasoline Engine
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s
engine, the engine oil must be maintained at
the correct level. The best time to check the
engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully
warmed up engine is shut off or before starting
the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level
ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level
readings. Always maintain the oil level within
the SAFE zone on the dipstick. Adding one
quart of oil when the reading is at the bottom of
the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the top
of the safe zone on these engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will
cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This
could damage your engine.
Change Engine Oil
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the
proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 7,500 miles (12 000 km) or
six months whichever comes first.
Engine Oil Selection – Non ACEA
Categories
For best performance and maximum protection
under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer only recommends engine oils
that are API certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine
Oil Identification Symbol
This
symbol
means that the oil
has been certified
by the American
Petroleum Institute
(API). The manufacturer only recommends
API
Certified engine
oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil
as the chemicals can damage your engine.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Selection – ACEA Categories
For countries that use the ACEA European Oil
Categories for Service Fill Oils, use engine oils
that meet the requirements of ACEA C3, and
that are approved to MB 229.31 or MB 229.51.
Engine Oil Viscosity – 3.8L Engine
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all
operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle
fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine.
For information on engine oil filler cap location,
refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for further information.
NOTE:
SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to MB
229.31 or MB 229.51 may be used when SAE
5W-20 engine oil is not available.
Engine Oil – Diesel Engine
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine
oil must be maintained at the correct level.
Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as
every fuel stop.
For vehicles equipped with a Diesel Particulate
Filter (DPF), it is acceptable to have an oil level
up to 3/8 inch (10 mm) above the MAX line.
Beyond 3/8 inch (10 mm) it is recommended to
change the oil.
The best time to check the engine oil level is
about five minutes after a fully warmed engine
is shut off or before starting the engine after it
has sat overnight.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level
ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level
readings. Maintain the oil level between the
MIN and MAX markings on the dipstick. Adding
1 U.S. Quart (0.95 L) of oil when the reading is
at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on
these engines.
Engine Oil Selection – 2.8L Diesel Engine
Use only Diesel Engine Oils conforming to API
(American Petroleum Institute) Quality CJ-4 or
CI-4. For countries that use the ACEA European
Oil Categories for Service Fill Oils, use engine
oils that meet the requirements of ACEA C3.
Engine Oil Viscosity – 2.8L Diesel Engine
For vehicles equipped with a Diesel Particulate
Filter (DPF), 5W-30 ESP fully synthetic, low ash
oil that meets Chrysler Material Standard MS11106 must be used.
For vehicles that are not equipped with a Diesel
Particulate Filter (DPF), 0W-40 ESP fully synthetic oil that meets Chrysler Material Standard
MS-10725 may be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the
recommended oil quality requirements are met,
and the recommended maintenance intervals
for oil and filter changes are followed.
253
Materials Added to Engine Oils
Do not add any supplemental materials, other
than leak detection dyes, to the engine oil.
Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used
engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used
oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded,
can present a problem to the environment.
Contact your authorized dealer, service station,
or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely
discarded in your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a
new filter at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
All of the manufacturer’s engines have a fullflow type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this
type for replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most effi254
cient service. MOPAR姞 engine oil filters are
high quality oil filters and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the
proper maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
The air cleaner can provide protection in the
case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
cleaner unless it is necessary for repair or
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near
the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air cleaner removed. Failure
to do so can result in serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner
filters varies considerably. Only high quality
filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR姞 engine air cleaner filters are
a high quality filter and are recommended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenancefree battery. You will never have to add water,
nor is periodic maintenance required.
WARNING!
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Always wash hands after handling the battery.
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on
the battery that the positive cable is attached
to the positive post and the negative cable is
attached to the negative post. Battery posts
are marked (+) positive and negative (-) and
are identified on the battery case. Also, if a
“fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery
cables before connecting the charger to the
battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide
starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an
authorized dealer at the start of each warm
season. This service should include cleaning of
the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at
this time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for
your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can
explode, injuring you. Other unapproved
refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid risk of
personal injury or damage to the system,
adding refrigerant or any repair requiring
lines to be disconnected should be done by
an experienced repairman.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C System Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compressor Oil, and Refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and is
an ozone-saving product. However, the manu-
facturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealers or
other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such
items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points
and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, sliding doors and
hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically
with a lithium-based grease, such as MOPAR姞
Spray White Lube or equivalent, to assure
quiet, easy operation and to protect against
rust and wear. Prior to the application of any
lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped
clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating,
excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to
hood latching components to ensure proper
function. When performing other underhood
services, the hood latch, release mechanism
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year, preferably in the Fall and
Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality
255
lubricant, such as MOPAR姞 Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent, directly into the lock
cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades
and the windshield periodically with a sponge
or soft cloth and a mild non-abrasive cleaner.
This will remove accumulations of salt or road
film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
blades. Always use washer fluid when using
the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry
windshield. Avoid using the wiper blades to
remove frost or ice from the windshield. Keep
the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum
products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor performance of blades
may be present with chattering, marks, water lines or wet spots. If any condition is
present please proceed to clean wiper
256
blades with humid cloth removing any debris that may be affecting its function.
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers
and the rear window washer (if equipped) is
shared. The fluid reservoir is located in the
engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid
level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent only (not radiator
antifreeze). When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some washer fluid and apply it to a
cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades;
this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer
system in cold weather, select a solution or
mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature
range of your climate. This rating information
can be found on most washer fluid containers.
WARNING!
Commercial windshield washer solvents are
flammable. They could ignite and burn you.
Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust
system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected
inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of
the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and
adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to
seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle
is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as
required.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an
emissions control device and may seriously
reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance.
However, it is important to keep the engine
properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
CAUTION!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if
your vehicle is not kept in proper operating
condition. In the event of engine malfunction,
particularly involving engine misfire or other
apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation
of your vehicle with a severe malfunction
could cause the converter to overheat, resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
park over materials that can burn. Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into
contact with your exhaust system. Do not park
or operate your vehicle in areas where your
exhaust system can contact anything that can
burn.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor may
suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off
the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a tune up to manufacturer’s specifications,
should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the
ignition when the transmission is in gear and
the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or
towing the vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug
wires disconnected or removed, such as
when diagnostic testing.
• Do not idle the engine for prolonged periods
during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
• Do not allow the vehicle to run out of fuel.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties
being assessed against you.
Cooling System
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming
from under the hood, do not open the hood
until the radiator has had time to cool. Never
try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
257
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 months (before the onset of
freezing weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in
appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant
(antifreeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser (if equipped) or radiator for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by
gently spraying water from a garden hose
vertically down the face of the A/C condenser
(if equipped) or the back of the radiator core.
recovery bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING
SYSTEM IS HOT.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the coolant recovery
bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system
for leaks.
Selection Of Engine Coolant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended engine coolant (antifreeze). Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for further information.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by
draining a small amount of engine coolant
(antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock. If the
cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant
(antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant
258
Cooling System – Drain, Flush, and Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty and
contains a considerable amount of sediment,
clean and flush with reliable cooling system
cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the
proper maintenance interval.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other
than the specified HOAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) may result in engine damage
and may decrease corrosion protection. If a
non-HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is
introduced into the cooling system in an
emergency, it should be replaced with the
specified engine coolant (antifreeze) as
soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do
not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust
products, as they may not be compatible
with the antifreeze/engine coolant (antifreeze) and may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use
with Propylene Glycol based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of Propylene Glycol
base engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Engine Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved
engine coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine
coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to 5 Years
or 105,000 miles (168 000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that you use the
same engine coolant (antifreeze) throughout
the life of your vehicle. Please review these
recommendations for using Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze).
When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• The manufacturer recommends using
MOPAR姞
Antifreeze/Coolant
5
Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) and distilled water. Use
higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if
temperatures below -34°F (-37°C) are anticipated.
engine coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use
of lower quality water will reduce the amount
of corrosion protection in the engine cooling
system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility
to maintain the proper level of protection
against freezing according to the temperatures
occurring in the area where the vehicle is
operated.
NOTE:
Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will
decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and will require more frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) changes.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss
of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure
that engine coolant (antifreeze) will return to the
radiator from the coolant reserve tank.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if
there is any accumulation of foreign material on
the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety
precaution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is overheated. Do not
loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build
up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding
or injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
Disposal of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant
(antifreeze) is a regulated substance requiring
proper disposal. Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or
children, do not store ethylene glycol based
engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers
or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground.
If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency
assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled
or deionized water when mixing the water/
259
Engine Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is
adequate. With the engine idling, and warm to
normal operating temperature, the level of the
engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should
be between the ranges indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full,
so there is no need to remove the radiator cap
unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze)
freeze point or replacing engine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant of this.
As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be
checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is
needed to maintain the proper level, it should
be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few
miles/kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front of the
engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
260
humidity accumulating on the radiator and
being vaporized when the thermostat opens,
allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to
enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment
shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks,
the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will
soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant bottle.
• Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze
point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)
needs to be added, the contents of the
coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are required, or if the level in the
recovery bottle does not drop when the
engine cools, the cooling system should be
pressure-tested for leaks.
• Maintain the engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at 50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum) and distilled water for
proper corrosion protection of your engine
which contains aluminum components.
• Make sure that the radiator and coolant
recovery bottle hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your
vehicle is equipped with air conditioning,
keep the front of the condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or
Winter operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in unsatisfactory cooling performance, poor gas mileage,
and increased emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance,
all brake system components should be inspected periodically. Refer to the “Maintenance
Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure
and possibly an accident. Driving with your
foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can
result in abnormally high brake temperatures,
excessive lining wear, and possible brake
damage. You would not have your full braking
capacity in an emergency.
Power Disc Brakes
Disc brakes do not require adjustment; however, several hard stops during the break-in
period are recommended to seat the linings
and wear off any foreign material.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level in the master cylinders should be
checked whenever the vehicle is serviced. If
necessary, add fluid to bring level to the full
level mark on the side of the reservoir of the
brake master cylinder. With disc brakes, fluid
level can be expected to fall as the brake pads
wear. If the brake fluid level is abnormally low,
check system for leaks.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended
brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants,
and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for further information. Using the
wrong type of brake fluid can severely
damage your brake system and/or impair
its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also labeled on the
original factory installed hydraulic master
cylinder reservoir.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter
or moisture, use only new brake fluid or
fluid that has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder reservoir
cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in a
open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This
may cause it to boil unexpectedly during
hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could result in a
accident.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire.
Brake fluid can also damage painted and
vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be damaged, causing partial
or complete brake failure. This could result
in an accident.
261
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped
Selection of Lubricant
It is important that the proper lubricant is used
in the transmission to assure optimum transmission performance. Use only manufacturer’s
recommended transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. It is
important that the transmission fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be
used in any transmission; only the approved
lubricant may be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or
torque converter shudder. Using a transmission
fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid will result in more frequent fluid
and filter changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants,
and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
262
Special Additives
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its performance may be
impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore,
do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this policy is the use
of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks. In
addition, avoid using transmission sealers as
they may adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level while the transmission is at
normal operating temperature 180° F (82° C).
This occurs after at least 15 miles (25 km) of
driving. At normal operating temperature, the
fluid cannot be held comfortably between the
fingertips.
To properly check the automatic transmission
fluid level, the following procedure must be
used:
1. Operate the engine at idle speed and normal operating temperature.
2. The vehicle must be on level ground.
3. Fully apply the parking brake.
4. Place the shift lever momentarily into each
gear position ending with the shift lever in
PARK.
5. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and
reinsert it until seated.
6. Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid
level on both sides. The fluid level should be
between the HOT (upper) reference holes on
the dipstick at normal operating temperature.
Verify that a solid coating of oil is seen on both
sides of the dipstick. If the fluid is low, add as
required into the dipstick tube. Do not overfill.
After adding any quantity of oil through the
dipstick tube, wait a minimum of two minutes
for the oil to fully drain into the transmission
before rechecking the fluid level.
NOTE:
If it is necessary to check the transmission
below the operating temperature, the fluid
level should be between the two cold (lower)
holes on the dipstick with the fluid at approximately 70° F (21° C) (room temperature). If the fluid level is correctly established at room temperature, it should be
between the HOT (upper) reference holes
when the transmission reaches 180° F (21°
C). Remember it is best to check the level at
the normal operating temperature.
CAUTION!
Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below
50° F (10° C), it may not register on the
dipstick. Do not add fluid until the temperature
is elevated enough to produce an accurate
reading.
7. Check for leaks. Release the parking brake.
NOTE:
To prevent dirt and water from entering the
transmission after checking or replenishing
fluid, make certain that the dipstick cap is
properly reseated. It is normal for the dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its
fully seated position, as long as its seal
remains engaged in the dipstick tube.
Hydraulic Clutch Fluid – Manual
Transmission
The clutch hydraulic system is a sealed
maintenance-free system. In the event of leakage or other malfunction, the system must be
replaced.
Manual Transmission – If Equipped
Selection of Lubricant
Use only manufacturer’s recommended
manual transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids,
Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
installed at the factory will give satisfactory
lubrication for the life of the vehicle. Fluid
changes are not necessary unless the lubricant
has become contaminated with water. If contaminated with water, the fluid should be
changed immediately.
Transfer Case – If Equipped
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of
the fill hole (A) when the vehicle is in a level
position.
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug.
The fluid level should be between the bottom of
the fill hole and a point not more than 3/16 in
(4.76 mm) below the bottom of the hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper
level.
263
Adding Fluid
Fluid should be added only at filler hole until
fluid begins to run out of the hole.
Adding Fluid
Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the
level specified above.
The following maintenance recommendations
will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from
the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
Drain
First remove the fill plug (B), then the drain plug
(C). The recommended tightening torque for
the drain and fill plugs is 15 to 25 ft lbs (20 to
34 N·m).
Selection of Lubricant
Use only manufacturer’s recommended fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from
your vehicle.
Appearance Care and Protection
from Corrosion
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
CAUTION!
When replacing the plugs, do not overtighten
them. You could damage them and cause
them to leak.
Selection of Lubricant
Use only manufacturer’s recommended fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Front/Rear Axle Fluid
Fluid Level Check
Lubricant should be at the bottom edge of the
oil fill hole.
264
Protection of Body and Paint from
Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according
to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals
that make roads passable in snow and ice, and
those that are sprayed on trees and road
surfaces during other seasons, are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which
the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold
weather and other extreme conditions will have
an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
underbody protection.
The most common causes are:
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near sea-coast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
• Bird droppings.
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash
your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR姞 Car
Wash or equivalent, or a mild car wash soap,
and rinse the panels completely with clear
water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR姞
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover or
equivalent to remove.
Special Care
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as
MOPAR姞 Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film, stains, and to protect your
paint finish. Take care never to scratch the
paint.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower
edges of the doors, rocker panels and tailgate are kept clear and open.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin
out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning
materials such as steel wool or scouring
powder, which will scratch metal and
painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a month.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in
the paint, touch them up immediately. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause which destroys the
paint and protective coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost
of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., assure that
such materials are well packaged and
sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
consider installing mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use MOPAR姞 Touch-Up Paint or equivalent
on scratches or chips as soon as possible.
Your authorized dealer has touch-up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum
and chrome-plated wheels, should be cleaned
regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent
corrosion. To remove heavy soil, use MOPAR姞
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent, or select a nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush or metal
polishes. Only MOPAR姞 cleaners or equivalent
are recommended. Do not use oven cleaner.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or harsh brushes that may damage
the wheels’ protective finish.
Interior Care
Use MOPAR姞 Total Clean or equivalent to clean
fabric upholstery and carpeting.
Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a
damp cloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR姞 Total
Clean or equivalent, then MOPAR姞 Spot & Stain
Remover or equivalent if absolutely necessary.
265
Do not use harsh cleaners or Armor All姞. Use
MOPAR姞 Total Clean or equivalent to clean
vinyl upholstery.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. Many are potentially flammable and, if
used in closed areas, they may cause respiratory harm.
CAUTION!
When installing hanging air fresheners in your
vehicle, read the installation instructions carefully. Some air fresheners will damage the
finish of painted or decorated parts if allowed
to directly contact any surface.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a
regular basis with MOPAR姞 Glass Cleaner or
any commercial household-type glass cleaner.
Never use an abrasive-type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning inside rear windows
266
equipped with electric defrosters. Do not use
scrapers or other sharp instruments which may
scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray
cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using.
Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When
cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to
avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet, soft rag. A mild soap
solution may be used, but do not use high
alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is
used, wipe clean with a clean damp rag.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with
chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This
will weaken the fabric. Sun damage will also
weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR姞 Total
Clean or equivalent, a mild soap solution, or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from
the vehicle to wash them.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn
or if the buckles do not work properly.
Appearance Care For Fabric Top Models
CAUTION!
To maintain the appearance of your vehicle’s
interior trim and top, follow these precautions:
• Avoid leaving your vehicle unattended with
the top down, as exposure to sun or rain may
damage interior trim.
• Do not use harsh cleaners or bleaching
agents on top material, as damage may
result.
• Do not allow any vinyl cleaner to run down
and dry on the paint, leaving a streak.
• After cleaning your vehicle’s fabric top, always make sure it is completely dry before
lowering.
• Be especially careful when washing the windows by following the directions for “Care of
Fabric Top Windows.”
WASHING — Use MOPAR姞 Car Wash or
equivalent, or mild soap suds, lukewarm water,
and a brush with soft bristles. If extra cleaning
is required, use MOPAR姞 Convertible Cloth Top
Cleaner or equivalent, or a mild foaming
cleaner on the entire top, but support the top
from underneath.
RINSING — Be sure to remove all traces of
cleaner by rinsing the top thoroughly with clean
water. Remember to allow the top to dry before
lowering it.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause
interior water damage, stains or mildew on the
top material:
• Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they
can damage the top material. Also, increased water pressure may force past the
weather strips.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• It is recommended that the top be free of
water prior to opening it. Operating the top,
opening a door or lowering a window while
the top is wet may allow water to drip into
the vehicle’s interior.
• Use care when washing the vehicle, water
pressure directed at the weather strip seals
may cause water to leak into the vehicle’s
interior.
• Careless handling and storage of the removable roof panels may damage the
seals, causing water to leak into the vehicle’s interior.
• The front panel(s) must be positioned properly to ensure sealing. Improper installation
can cause water to leak into the vehicle’s
interior.
Care of Fabric Top Windows
CAUTION!
Your vehicle’s fabric top has pliable plastic
windows which can be scratched unless special care is taken by following these directions:
1. Never use a dry cloth to remove dust. Instead, use a microfiber towel or soft cotton
cloth moistened with cold or warm, clean
water, and wipe across the window, not up
and down. MOPAR姞 Jeep Soft Glass Window
Cleaner or equivalent will safely clean all plastic
windows without scratching. It removes fine
scratches to improve visibility and provides UV
protection to help prevent yellowing.
2. When washing, never use hot water or
anything stronger than a mild soap. Never use
solvents such as alcohol or harsh cleaning
agents.
3. Always rinse thoroughly with cold water,
then wipe with a soft and slightly moist, clean
cloth.
267
4. When removing frost, snow or ice, never
use a scraper or de-icing chemicals. Use
warm water only if you must clean the window
quickly.
6. Never paste stickers, gummed labels or any
tape to the windows. Adhesives are hard to
remove and may damage the windows.
5. Debris (sand, mud/dirt, dust, or salt) from
off-road driving will have a major impact on
zipper operation. Even normal on-road driving
and vehicle washing will eventually impact window zipper operation. To maintain ease of use
of the window zippers, each window zipper
should be cleaned and lubricated regularly.
Use MOPAR姞 Soft Top Zipper Cleaner and
Lubricant or equivalent to ease zipper operation. Before applying, make sure the zipper
teeth are clear of sand, mud, and other materials. Clean both sides of the zipper, not just
one side. Rinse both zipper halves with fresh
water and allow to dry. Aggressively work the
MOPAR姞 Soft Top Zipper Cleaner and Lubricant or equivalent into the zipper teeth. If a
stuck zipper slide is experienced, work the
MOPAR姞 Soft Top Zipper Cleaner and Lubricant or equivalent into the zipper slide. Several
applications may be required before the zipper
comes free.
FUSES
268
Cavity
J1
J2
Totally Integrated Power Module
The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is
located in the engine compartment near the
battery. This center contains cartridge fuses,
mini fuses and relays. A label that identifies
each component is printed on the inside of the
cover.
Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM)
J3
J4
J5
J6
Cartridge
Fuse
—
30 Amp
Pink
—
25 Amp
Natural
25 Amp
Natural
40 Amp
Green
J7
30 Amp
Pink
J8
J9
—
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
J10
Mini
Fuse
Description
—
Transfer Case
Module
—
Driver Door
Node
Passenger Door
Node
Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS)
Pump/Stability
Control System
Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS)
Valve/Stability
Control System
—
PZEV Sec
Motor/Flex Fuel
Headlamp Wash
Relay/Manifold
Tuning Valve
Cavity
J11
J13
J14
J15
J17
J18
J19
J20
J21
J22
Cartridge
Fuse
30 Amp
Pink
60 Amp
Yellow
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
40 Amp
Green
20 Amp
Blue
60 Amp
Yellow
30 Amp
Pink
20 Amp
Blue
—
Mini
Fuse
Description
Sway Bar
Cavity
M1
Ignition Off Draw
(IOD) – Main
Rear Defroster
M2
Front Blower
Starter Solenoid
M3
Powertrain Control Module
(PCM) Trans
Range
Radiator Fan
M4
M5
M6
M7
Front Wiper
LO/HI
Front/Rear
Washer
Spare
M8
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
15 Amp Center HighBlue
Mounted Stop
Light (CHMSL)/
Switch Stop
Lamp Feed
20 Amp Relay Trailer
Yellow Lighting (Stoplamp)
20 Amp Frt/Rear Axle
Yellow Locker Relay
—
—
25 Amp Power Inverter –
Natural If Equipped
20 Amp Power Outlet
Yellow #1/Rain Sensor
20 Amp Power Outlet #2
Yellow (BATT/ACC SELECT)
20 Amp Front Heated
Yellow Seat
Cavity
M9
M10
M11
M12
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
20 Amp Rear Heated
Yellow Seat – If
Equipped
20 Amp Ignition Off Draw
Yellow – Vehicle Entertainment System,
Satellite Digital
Audio Receiver
(SDARS), DVD,
Hands-Free
Module, RADIO,
Antenna, Universal Garage Door
Opener, Vanity
Lamp
10 Amp (Ignition Off
Red
Draw) Climate
Control System,
Underhood Lamp
30 Amp Amplifier
Green
269
Cavity
M13
M14
M15
270
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
20 Amp Ignition Off Draw
Yellow – Cabin Compartment Node,
Wireless Control
Module, SIREN,
Multifunction
Control Switch
20 Amp Trailer Tow (ExYellow port Only)
20 Amp Climate Control
Yellow System, Rear
View Mirror,
Cabin Compartment Node,
Transfer Case
Switch, MultiFunction Control
Switch, Tire
Pressure Monitor, Glow Plug
Module – Export
Diesel Only
Cavity
M16
M17
M18
M19
M20
M21
M22
M23
M24
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Blue
15 Amp
Blue
25 Amp
Natural
15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
25 Amp
Natural
Description
Airbag Module
Left Tail/License/
Park Lamp
Right Tail/Park/
Run Lamp
Auto Shut Down
(ASD #1 and #2)
Cabin Compartment Node Interior Light, Switch
Bank
Auto Shut Down
(ASD #3)
Right Horn (HI/
LOW)
Left Horn (HI/
LOW)
Rear Wiper
Cavity
M25
M26
M27
M28
M29
M30
M31
M32
M33
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
20 Amp Fuel Pump, DieYellow sel Lift Pump –
Export Only
—
—
10 Amp Ignition Switch
Red
Feed, Wireless
Module
10 Amp Powertrain ConRed
trol Module
—
—
15 Amp Wiper Motor Frt,
Blue
J1962 Diagnostic
Feed
20 Amp Backup Lamps
Yellow
10 Amp Airbag Controller,
Red
TT EUROPE
10 Amp Powertrain ConRed
troller
Cavity
M34
M35
M36
M37
M38
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
10 Amp Park Assist, CliRed
mate Control
System, Headlamp Wash,
Compass
10 Amp Heated Mirrors
Red
20 Amp Power Outlet
Yellow
10 Amp Anti-Lock Brake
Red
System, Electronic Stability
Control, Stop
Lamp Switch,
Fuel Pump Relay
25 Amp Lock/Unlock MoNatural tors
CAUTION!
• When installing the Integrated Power Module cover, it is important to ensure the cover
is properly positioned and fully latched.
Failure to do so may allow water to get into
the Integrated Power Module, and possibly
result in an electrical system failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important
to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a
rating other than indicated may result in a
dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must
be corrected.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more
than 21 days, you may want to take steps to
protect your battery. You may:
• Remove Cartridge fuse #J13 in the Power
Distribution Center (PDC) labeled IgnitionOff Draw (IOD) and store it in a safe location
within the PDC.
• Or, disconnect the negative cable from the
battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out
of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or
more, run the air conditioning system at idle
for about five minutes in the fresh air and
high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the
system is started again.
271
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Lights
Bulb Type
Auto. Trans. Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . 658
Courtesy Lights, Under Dash (1) . . . . . 906
Heater Control Lamps (2) . . . . . . . . . 194
Rocker Switch Indicator Lamp
(Rear Window Defogger, and
Rear Wash/Wipe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . **
Soundbar Dome Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . 912
** Bulbs only available from authorized dealer.
272
Exterior Lights
Bulb Type
Backup Lamps (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . W16W
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (1) . . L.E.D.
Front Fog Lamps (2) . . . . . . . . . PSX24W
Rear Fog Lamps (2) . . . . . . . . . . P27/7W
Front Direction Lamps (2) . . . . . . . P27/7W
Front Side Repeaters/Side Marker
Lamps (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
Headlamps (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H4
Front Position Lamps (2) . . . . . . . 12V14W
Stop/Rear Position Lamps (2) . . . . . P27/7W
Rear Direction Lamps (2). . . . . . . PY27/7W
License Lamp (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
NOTE:
Numbers refer to commercial bulb types
that can be purchased from your local authorized dealer.
If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your
authorized dealer or refer to the applicable
Service Manual.
FLUID CAPACITIES
Fuel (Approximate) — Two Door Models
Fuel (Approximate) — Four Door Models
Engine Oil with Filter
3.8 Liter Engine
2.8 Liter Diesel Engine
Cooling System *
3.8 Liter Engine (MOPAR姞 Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula
or equivalent.)
2.8 Liter Diesel Engine (MOPAR姞 Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile
Formula or equivalent.)
* Includes coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
U.S.
18.5 Gallons
22.5 Gallons
Metric
70 Liters
85 Liters
6 Quarts
7 Quarts
5.7 Liters
6.6 Liters
13 Quarts
12 Liters
13 Quarts
12 Liters
273
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil – Gasoline (Non ACEA Categories)
Engine Oil – Gasoline (ACEA Categories)
Engine Oil - Diesel (without Particulate Filter)
Engine Oil – Diesel (with Particulate Filter)
Spark Plugs – 3.8L Engine
Engine Oil Filter
Fuel Selection – Gasoline Engines
Fuel Selection – Diesel Engines
274
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR姞 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 engine oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard
MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade. SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to
MB 229.31 or MB 229.51 may be used when SAE 5W-20 engine oil is not available.
For countries that use the ACEA European Oil Categories for Service Fill Oils, use engine oils meeting the requirements of ACEA C3, and approved to MB 229.31 or MB 229.51. SAE 5W-30 engine oil
approved to MB 229.31 or MB 229.51 may be used when SAE 5W-20 engine oil is not available.
Use SAE 0W-40 diesel engine oils confirming to API Quality CI-4 or CJ-4. For countries that use the
ACEA European Oil Categories for Service Fill Oils, use engine oils meeting the requirements of
ACEA C3 and approved to MB 229.31 or MB 229.51.
Use SAE 5W-30 diesel engine oils conforming to API Quality CI-4 or CJ-4. For countries that use the
ACEA European Oil Categories for Service Fill Oils, use engine oils meeting the requirements of
ACEA C3 (LOW ASH) and approved to MB 229.31 or MB 229.51.
RE14PLP5 (Gap 0.050 in [1.27 mm])
MOPAR姞 Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
91 Octane
50 Cetane or higher (Less than 15 ppm Sulfur)
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped
Manual Transmission – If Equipped
Transfer Case
Axle Differential (Front)
Axle Differential (Rear)
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR姞 ATF+4姞 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF+4姞 product.
MOPAR姞 Manual Transmission Lubricant or equivalent (meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material
Standard MS-9224)
MOPAR姞 ATF+4姞 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF+4姞 product.
MOPAR姞 Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 80W-90) (API GL-5) or equivalent.
226 RBI (Model 44) - MOPAR姞 Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 80W-90) (API GL-5) or equivalent. For
trailer towing, use MOPAR姞 Synthetic Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 75W-140) or equivalent. Models
equipped with Trac-Lok require an additive.
MOPAR姞 DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used or equivalent. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available,
then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids.
MOPAR姞 Power Steering Fluid + 4, MOPAR姞 ATF+4姞 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF+4姞 product.
275
276
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
• MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
• Maintenance Schedule – Gasoline Engine . . . . . . . . . 278
• Maintenance Schedule – Diesel Engine . . . . . . . . . . . 290
277
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Maintenance Schedule – Gasoline
Engine
The oil change indicator system will remind you
that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, “CHANgE
OIL” will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound, indicating
that an oil change is necessary.
The oil change indicator message will illuminate approximately 7,000 miles (11 200 km)
after the most recent oil change was performed. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as
possible, within 500 miles (800 km). However,
an earlier oil change at 3,000 miles (5 000 km)
may be required if the vehicle is operated
under “Severe Duty Conditions” later in this
section.
NOTE:
• The oil change indicator message will not
monitor the time since the last oil change.
Change your vehicle’s oil if it has been six
278
months since your last oil change even if
the oil change indicator message is NOT
illuminated.
• Change your engine oil more often if you
drive your vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
• Under no circumstances should oil
change intervals exceed 7,500 miles
(12 000 km) or six months, whichever
comes first.
Your dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil
change. If this scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your dealer, the
message can be reset by referring to the steps
described
under
“Instrument
Cluster
Description/Odometer/Trip Odometer” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
At Each Stop for Fuel
• Check the engine oil level about five minutes
after a fully warmed engine is shut off.
Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on
level ground will improve the accuracy of the
oil level reading. Add oil only when the level
is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
• Check the windshield washer solvent and
add if required.
Once a Month
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual
wear or damage.
• Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the
terminals as required.
• Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir,
brake master cylinder, power steering and
transmission and add as needed.
• Check all lights and other electrical items for
correct operation.
At Each Oil Change
• Change the engine oil filter.
• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
• Check the manual transmission fluid level.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance
items may result in damage to the vehicle.
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the
following pages for the required maintenance
intervals.
Severe Duty Conditions
†† Change the engine oil and engine oil filter at
every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or three months if
using your vehicle under any of the following
severe duty conditions:
• Stop and go driving.
• Driving in dusty conditions.
• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
• Trailer towing.
• Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial
service).
• Off-road or desert operation.
279
7,500 Miles (12,000 km) or
6 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.††
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
280
Date
Dealer Code
15,000 Miles (24,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.††
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front & rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
22,500 Miles (36,000 km) or
18 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.††
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if
necessary.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends
and boot seals, replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
30,000 Miles (48,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.††
Rotate tires.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Inspect the front & rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: trailer
towing, snow plowing, heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service (commercial service),
off-road, desert operation or more than 50% of your driving is at sustained high speeds
during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Date
Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
281
37,500 Miles (60,000 km) or
30 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.††
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
282
Date
Dealer Code
45,000 Miles (72,000 km) or 36 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.††
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front & rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals, replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
52,500 Miles (84,000 km) or
42 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.††
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
60,000 Miles (96,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.††
Rotate tires.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Inspect the front & rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: trailer
towing, snow plowing, heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service (commercial service),
off-road, desert operation or more than 50% of your driving is at sustained high speeds
during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and main sump filter if using your vehicle for any
of the following: police, taxi, fleet or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi,
fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Date
Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
283
67,500 Miles (108,000 km) or
54 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
75,000 Miles (120,000 km) or
60 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
82,500 Miles (132,000 km) or
66 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.††
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if
necessary.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends
and boot seals, replace if necessary.
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.††
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace
if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front & rear axle fluid, change
if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at
60 months if not done at 105,000 miles
(168 000 km).
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.††
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
284
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
90,000 Miles (144,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.††
Rotate tires.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.†
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Inspect the front & rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing.
Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals, replace if necessary.
Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: trailer towing, snow plowing, heavy loading, taxi, police,
delivery service (commercial service), off-road, desert operation or more than 50% of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot
weather, above 90°F (32°C).
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Date
Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
285
97,500 Miles (156,000 km) or
78 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.††
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
286
Date
Dealer Code
105,000 Miles (168,000 km) or 84 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.††
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the ignition cables.
❏ Replace the spark plugs.
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant if not done at 60 months.
❏ Inspect the front & rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
112,500 Miles (180,000 km) or
90 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.††
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if
necessary.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends
and boot seals, replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
120,000 Miles (192,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.††
Rotate tires.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace accessory drive belt(s).
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Inspect the front & rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi,
fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: trailer
towing, snow plowing, heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service (commercial service),
off-road, desert operation or more than 50% of your driving is at sustained high speeds
during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid, and filter(s).
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Date
Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
287
127,500 Miles (204,000 km) or
102 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.††
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
288
Date
Dealer Code
135,000 Miles (216,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.††
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front & rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals, replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
142,500 Miles (228,000 km) or
114 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.††
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
150,000 Miles (240,000 km) or 120 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.††
Rotate tires.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Inspect the front & rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: trailer
towing, snow plowing, heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service (commercial service),
off-road, desert operation or more than 50% of your driving is at sustained high speeds
during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Date
Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
289
† This maintenance is recommended by the
manufacturer to the owner, but is not required
to maintain emissions warranty.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around
a motor vehicle. Do only service work for
which you have the knowledge and the right
equipment. If you have any doubt about your
ability to perform a service job, take your
vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Maintenance Schedule – Diesel
Engine
Diesel Models with Diesel Particulate Filter
(DPF)
The oil change indicator system will remind you
that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
A “CHANgE OIL” message will flash in the
instrument cluster odometer and a single
chime will sound, indicating that an oil change
is necessary.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate, this
means that service is required for your vehicle.
Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
Your dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil
change. If this scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your dealer the
message can be reset by referring to the steps
described
under
“Instrument
Cluster
Description/Odometer/Trip Odometer” in ⬙Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
290
Diesel Models without Diesel Particulate
Filter (DPF)
†† Change the engine oil and engine oil filter at
every 6,250 miles (10 000 km) or six months if
using your vehicle under any of the following
severe duty conditions:
• Stop and go driving.
• Driving in dusty conditions.
• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
• Trailer towing.
• Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial
service).
• Off-road or desert operation.
At Each Stop for Fuel
• Check the engine oil level about five minutes
after a fully warmed engine is shut off.
Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on
level ground will improve the accuracy of the
oil level reading. Add oil only when the level
is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
• Check the windshield washer solvent, add
as required.
Once a Month
• Check the tire pressure and look for unusual
wear or damage.
• Inspect the battery; clean and tighten the
terminals as required.
• Check the fluid levels of engine coolant/
antifreeze deaeration bottle, brake master
cylinder, and transmission, and add as
needed.
• Check all lights and all other electrical items
for correct operation.
At Each Oil Change
• Change the engine oil filter.
• Inspect the exhaust system.
• Inspect brake hoses.
• Check the engine coolant/antifreeze level,
hoses, and clamps.
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the
following pages for the required maintenance
intervals.
12,500 Miles (20,000 km) or
12 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 12,500 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months, whichever comes first.
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.††
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road
conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner
filter, and replace if necessary.
❏ Drain the fuel filter/water separator unit.
❏ Drain and refill the front and rear axle
fluid.
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid, add if
necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings.
Odometer Reading
• Inspect engine accessory drive belts. Replace as necessary.
Repair Order #
• Inspect for the presence of water in the fuel
filter/water separator unit.
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
291
25,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.††
Rotate tires.
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Drain the fuel filter/water separator unit.
Replace the fuel filter/water separator unit.
Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid.
Inspect the transfer case fluid, add if necessary.
Inspect the brake linings.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
292
Date
Dealer Code
37,500 Miles (60,000 km) or
36 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.††
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road
conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner
filter, and replace if necessary.
❏ Drain the fuel filter/water separator unit.
❏ Drain and refill the front and rear axle
fluid.
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid, add if
necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings.
❏ Replace the engine accessory drive belt.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
50,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.††
Rotate tires.
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Drain the fuel filter/water separator unit.
Replace the fuel filter/water separator unit.
Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid.
Inspect the transfer case fluid, add if necessary.
Inspect the brake linings.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Date
Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
293
62,500 Miles (100,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.††
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and
replace if necessary.
❏ Drain the fuel filter/water separator unit.
❏ Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid.
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid, add if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings.
❏ Inspect the manual transmission fluid, add as necessary.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and main sump filter if using your vehicle for any
of the following: police, taxi, fleet or frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
294
Date
Dealer Code
75,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.††
Rotate tires.
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Drain the fuel filter/water separator unit.
Replace the fuel filter/water separator unit.
Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid.
Inspect the transfer case fluid, add if necessary.
Inspect the brake linings.
Replace the engine accessory drive belt.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
87,500 Miles (140,000 km) or
84 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.††
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road
conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner
filter, and replace if necessary.
❏ Drain the fuel filter/water separator unit.
❏ Drain and refill the front and rear axle
fluid.
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid, add if
necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Date
Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
295
100,000 Miles (160,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.††
Rotate tires.
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
Flush and replace the engine coolant (antifreeze).
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Drain the fuel filter/water separator unit.
Replace the fuel filter/water separator unit.
Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid.
Inspect the transfer case fluid, add if necessary.
Inspect the brake linings.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
296
Date
Dealer Code
112,500 Miles (180,000 km) or
108 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.††
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road
conditions, inspect the engine air cleaner
filter, and replace if necessary.
❏ Drain the fuel filter/water separator unit.
❏ Drain and refill the front and rear axle
fluid.
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid, add if
necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings.
❏ Replace the engine accessory drive belt.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
125,000 Miles (200,000 km) or 120 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.††
Rotate tires.
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Drain the fuel filter/water separator unit.
Replace the fuel filter/water separator unit.
Replace the engine timing belt, and timing belt tensioner.
Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid.
Inspect the transfer case fluid, add if necessary.
Inspect the brake linings.
Inspect the manual transmission fluid, add as necessary.
Drain and refill the automatic transmission fluid. Replace main sump filter and spin-on
cooler return filter (if equipped).
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around
a motor vehicle. Do only that service work for
which you have the knowledge and the right
equipment. If you have any doubt about your
ability to perform a service job, take your
vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Inspection and service should be performed
anytime a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all receipts.
Date
Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
297
298
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
• IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . .
• ARGENTINA . . . . . . . . . . .
• AUSTRALIA . . . . . . . . . . .
• AUSTRIA . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• BALANCE OF THE CARIBBEAN
• BELGIUM . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• BOLIVIA . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• BRAZIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• BULGARIA . . . . . . . . . . . .
• CHILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• CHINA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• COLOMBIA . . . . . . . . . . . .
• COSTA RICA . . . . . . . . . . .
• CROATIA . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• CZECH REPUBLIC . . . . . . .
• DENMARK . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
302
302
302
302
302
302
302
302
303
303
303
303
303
303
303
303
299
• DOMINICAN REPUBLIC . . . . . .
• ECUADOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• EL SALVADOR . . . . . . . . . . . .
• ESTONIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• FINLAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• FRANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• GERMANY . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• GRAND DUCHY OF LUXEMBOURG
• GREECE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• GUATEMALA . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• HONDURAS . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• HUNGARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• IRELAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• ITALY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• LATVIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• LITHUANIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• NETHERLANDS . . . . . . . . . . .
• NEW ZEALAND . . . . . . . . . . .
• NORWAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• PANAMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• PARAGUAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• PERU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
300
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
303
304
304
304
304
304
304
304
304
304
305
305
305
305
305
305
305
305
305
305
305
306
• POLAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• PORTUGAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS
• ROMANIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• RUSSIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• SLOVENIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• SPAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• SWEDEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• SWITZERLAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• TAIWAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• TURKEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• UKRAINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• UNITED KINGDOM . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• URUGUAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• VENEZUELA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
306
306
306
306
306
306
306
306
307
307
307
307
307
307
307
301
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
• Service history of your vehicle.
BALANCE OF THE CARIBBEAN
The manufacturer distributors are vitally interested in your satisfaction with their products
and services. If a servicing problem or other
difficulty should occur, we recommend that you
take the following steps:
• An accurate description of the problem and
the conditions under which it occurs.
Interamericana Trading Company
Warrens, St. Michael
Barbados, West Indies
Tel.: 246–417–8000
Fax: 246–425–2888
Discuss the problem at the authorized dealer
with the dealer principal or the service manager. Management personnel at the authorized
dealer are in the best position to resolve the
problem quickly.
When you contact the distributor please
provide all of the following information:
• Your name, address and phone number.
• Vehicle Identification Number (this 17 digit
number is found on an etched plate or label,
located on the left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through the windshield. It
is also available from your vehicle registration or title).
• Selling and servicing authorized dealer.
• Vehicle’s delivery date and current odometer
distance.
302
ARGENTINA
Chrysler Argentina S.A
Boulevard Azucena Villaflor 435
C1107CII
Buenos Aires, Argentina
Tel.: +54-11-4891 7900
Fax: +54-11-4891 7901
AUSTRALIA
Chrysler
Chrysler Australia Pty. Ltd.
ACN 124 956 505
PO Box 4145, Dandenong South Vic. 3175
Ph. (03) 9238–2600
AUSTRIA
Chrysler Austria Gesellschaft m.b.H.
Felmayergasse 2
A-1210 Wien
Tel: +43-1-5465 15131
Fax: +43-1-5465 15132
BELGIUM
Chrysler Belgium Luxembourg NV
Tollaan 68
B-1200 Brussel
Tel.: 0800-94634 (free phone number)
Fax:+32 (0)2 717 3301
BOLIVIA
Ovando & Cia S.A.
Av. Cristobal de Mendoza (2do Anillo) y Canal
Isuto
Santa Cruz, Bolivia
Tel.: (591-3) 336 3100
Fax: (591-3) 334 0229
BRAZIL
Chrysler do Brasil
Av. Alfred Jurzykowski, 562
09680-900 São Bernardo do Campo-S.P
Tel: 55 11 4173 6611
Fax: 55 11 4173 9200
BULGARIA
COLOMBIA
CZECH REPUBLIC
BALKAN STAR
Resbarska Str. 5
1510 Sofia
Tel.: 359 2 91988
Fax: 359 2 945 40 14
Chrysler Colombia S.A.
Avenida Calle 26 # 70A-25
Bogotá Colombia
Tel: 57 1 4236700
Fax: 57 (1) 410 5667
CHILE
COSTA RICA
Comercial Chrysler S.A.
Av. Americo Vespucio 1601, Quilicura
Santiago, Chile
Tel.: (56-2) 620 7600
Fax: (56-2) 730 6201
AutoStar
La Uruca, frente al Banco Nacional
San José, Costa Rica
Tel.: (506) 295 - 0000
Fax: (506) 295 - 0052
Chrysler Czech Republic s.r.o
Daimlerova 2296/2
149 45 Praha 4 - Chodov
Czech Republic
Tel: +420 (0)2 71077 111
Tel: +420 (0)2 25101 111
Fax: +420 (0)2 71077 507
CHINA
CROATIA
Chrysler Group (China) Sales Limited
16F,Gemdale Plaza Tower A
No.91 Jian Guo Road
Chaoyang District
Beijing 100022, P.R. China
Chrysler Brand Tel: 400-650-1195
Dodge Brand Tel: 400-650-0118
EUROLINE d.o.o.
Kovinska 5
10 000 Zagreb
Tel.: 385 1 3441 111
Fax: 385 1 3441 113
DENMARK
Chrysler Danmark ApS
Frederikskaj 4
DK- 1790 København V.
Tel: +45 (0)35 256 830
Fax: +45 (0)35 256 832
DOMINICAN REPUBLIC
Reid y Compañia
John F. Kennedy Casi Esq. Lope de Vega
Santo Domingo, Dominican Republic
Tel.: (809) 562–7211
Fax: (809) 565-8774
303
ECUADOR
FINLAND
GRAND DUCHY OF LUXEMBOURG
Chrysler Jeep Automotriz del Ecuador
Av. Juan Tanca Marengo km. 4.5
Guayaquil, Ecuador
Tel.: (593) 4 225 7935
Fax: (593) 4 224 7787
Chrysler FinlandOy
Ristipellontie 5
00390 HELSINKI
Tel: 020 54771
Fax: 020 5477 485
EL SALVADOR
FRANCE
Grupo Q del Salvador
Blvd. Los Próceres y Avenida No. 1, Lomas de
San Francisco,
San Salvador, El Salvador
Tel.: (503) 22730988
Fax: (503) 278 5731
Chrysler France
Parc de Rocquencourt
BP100
F-78153 Le Chesnay Cedex
Tel: +33 1 39 23 56 00
Fax: +33 1 39 23 57 92
TNT MAILFAST
C/O Chrysler Belgium/Luxembourg
BRU/BRU/37850
Antwoord Nummer 193032
1930 Zaventem
Belgium
Tel.: 0800 6661
Fax: 32 02 717 33
ESTONIA
GERMANY
Silberauto AS
Järvevana tee 11
11314 Tallinn
Tel.: 06 266 098
Tel.: 06 266 050
Fax: 06 266 066
Chrysler Deutschland GmbH
Englische Straße 30
D-10587 Berlin
Telefon +49 (0)30 2690-0
Telefax +49 (0)30 2690 3999
304
GREECE
Chrysler Jeep Dodge Hellas
240-242 Kifisias Avenue
15231 Halandri Athens, Greece
Tel.: +30 210 6700800
Fax: +30 210 6700820
GUATEMALA
Grupo Q del Guatemala
Edificio Grupo Q, calle Mariscal Cruz 9-04,
Zona 4,
Ciudad de Guatemala, Guatemala
Tel.: +502 6685 9500
HONDURAS
ITALY
NEW ZEALAND
Grupo Q de Honduras
Blvd.. Centro América frente a Plaza Miraflores,
Tegucigalpa, Honduras
Tel.: (504) 235-9220
Fax: (504) 232-6564
Chrysler Italia S.r.l.
Via Giulio Vincenzo Bona, 110
00156 Roma
Tel: 06 41442812
Fax: 06 418823114
E-mail: [email protected]
Chrysler New Zealand
Private Bag 14907
Panmure New Zealand
Tel: 09573 7800
Fax: 09573 7808
LATVIA
Chrysler Norge A/S
Solheimveien 7
N-1471 Lørenskog
Tel : +47 67 92 60 00
Fax : +47 67 90 53 10
HUNGARY
Chrysler Automotive Hungaria Kft
H-1133 Budapest
Kárpát u 21
Tel.:+36-1-887-7000
Fax: +36-1-887-7098
IRELAND
C.J. IRELAND CONCESSIONAIRES LIMITED
Clonlara Avenue
Baldonnell Business Park
Baldonnell Dublin 22.
Ireland
Tel.: 1890 946866
TC MOTORS LTD.
40 Krasta Str.
LV-1003 Riga
Tel.: 07 812 312
FAX: 07 812 313
LITHUANIA
Silberauto AS
Laisves av. 125 A
LT — 2022 VILNIUS
Tel.: 02 301037
Fax: 02 301036
NETHERLANDS
Chrysler Nederland B.V.
Postbus 2088
NL-3500 GB Utrecht
Tel:+31 (0)30 247 19 11
Fax: +31 (0)30 247 16 00
NORWAY
PANAMA
Grupo Q de Panamá
Calle 50 Final, Edificio 68, San Francisco,
Panamá, Panamá
Tel.: (507) 303-1100
Fax: (507) 303-0980
PARAGUAY
Cencar S.A.
Avda Mariscal Lopez No. 5700
Asuncion, Paraguay
Tel.: 59521515911
Fax: 59521515924
305
PERU
Divemotor S.A.
Calle Alejandro Bussalleu 151, Urb. Sta.
Catalina - La Victoria
Lima, Peru
Tel.: (51-1) 712 2000
Fax: (51-1) 712 2002
PUERTO RICO AND U.S. VIRGIN
ISLANDS
Chrysler International Services, S.A.
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 009191857
Tel.: 7877825757
Fax: 7877823345
SLOVENIA
Chrysler/Jeep Import d.d.
Leskoskova 2
1122 Ljubljana
Tel.: 01 5843 138
Fax: 01 5843 222
SPAIN
POLAND
ROMANIA
Chrysler Polska Sp. z o.o.
ul. Gotlieba Daimlera 1
02-480 Warszawa
Tel:+ 801 330 300
S.C. Auto Rom S.R.L.
Bucuresti
Bd. Expozitiei nr. 2
RO-78334
Tel.: 01 2240020 25
Fax: 01 2241638
Chrysler España S.L.
Dpto. De Atención al Cliente Chrysler, Jeep y
Dodge
Apdo. De Correos 24
19200 Azuqueca de Henares (Guadalajara)
Tel.: 902 888 782
Fax: 913 496 529
RUSSIA
SWEDEN
Chrysler RUS SAO
39A Leningradsky prospect
125167 Moscow
Tel: +7 495 745-2600
Fax: +7 495 745-2601
Chrysler Sverige
Bronsyxegatan 14,
Box 50530
S-202 50 Malmö
Tel:+46 (0)8 752 9858
Fax: +46 (0)8 752 6483
PORTUGAL
Chrysler Portugal S.A.
Qta. da Fonte – Edif. Da Amélia
Rua Victor Câmara, 2 1aA
2770-229 Paço de Arcos
Portugal
Tel : +351 (0)21 323 91 00
Fax: +351 (0)21 323 91 99
306
SWITZERLAND
UKRAINE
VENEZUELA
Chrysler Switzerland GmbH
Bernstrasse 55
CH-8952 Schlieren
Tel:
• German : 0800 80 29 20
• French : 0800 80 29 21
• Italian : 0800 80 29 22
Telefax +41 (0) 44 755 64 00
JSC AutoCapital
Velyka Vasylkivska str. 15
01004 Kyiv
Tel.: +38 044 206 8888
Fax: +38 044 206 8889
Chrysler de Venezuela LLC
Avenida Pancho Pepe Croquer. Zona Industrial
Norte
Valencia, Estado Caraboro
Tel: +(58) 241-613 2400
Fax: +(58) 241-613 2538
Fax: (58) 241-6132602
(58) 241-6132438
PO BOX: 1960
Services And Parts
Zona Industrial II, Av. Norte-Sur 5 C/C Calle
Este-Oeste
C.C LD Center Local B-2
Valencia, Estado Carabobo
Telf: (58) 241-6132757
(58) 241-6132773
Fax: (58) 241-6132743
TAIWAN
Chrysler Taiwan Co. , LTD.
13th Floor Union Enterprise Plaza
1109 Min Sheng East Road, Section 3
Taipei Taiwan R.O.C.
Tel.: 080081581
Fax: 886225471871
TURKEY
Chrysler Jeep Tic. A.S.
TEM Otoyolu , Hadimkoy Cikisi
34900 Buyukcekmece - Istanbul
Tel : + 90 - 212 - 867 40 00
Fax : + 90 - 212 - 867 44 63
UNITED KINGDOM
Chrysler UK Ltd.
Tongwell
Milton Keynes MK15 8BA
Tel.: 01908 301090
Fax: 01908 301203
URUGUAY
Malunix. S.A.
Miguelete 2276
Montevideo, Uruguay
Tel: (598-2) 401 7818
Fax: (598-2) 402 2666
307
308
309
310
10
INDEX
311
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . 148,207
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air
Cleaner Filter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . 255
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . 165
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . 174
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . 255
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . 165,168
Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . 35,38,49,148
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . 8
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . 273
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . 207
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . 148
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Arming Theft System (Security Alarm) . . 15
312
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . 23
Automatic Oil Change Indicator . . . . . 160
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . 168
Automatic Transaxle
Interlock System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 191,262
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . 262
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Torque Converter . . . . . . . . . . 191,193
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power
Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Axle Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Keyless Transmitter Replacement
(RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25,49
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . 255
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . 208
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . 188
Break-In Recommendations, New
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . 48
Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57,165
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Check Engine Light (Malfunction
Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . 48
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . 38,39,44,46
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . 42,44
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Child Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . 165
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154,161
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . 154,160
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . 259
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . 259
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . 258
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . 260
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Selection of Coolant
(Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258,273
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . 140
Defroster, Windshield . . . . 49,166,167,171
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . 88
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . 251
Diesel Engine Maintenance . . . . . . . . 290
Diesel Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Diesel Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . 226
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . 85
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . 245
Disarming, Theft System . . . . . . . . . . 16
Disposal
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Used Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . 259
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Off-Pavement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Dual Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power
Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . 91
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . 208
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . 209
Electronic Roll Mitigation . . . . . . . . 211
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . 209
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . 211
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise
Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . 212
Electronic Throttle Control Warning
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154,158
Emergency Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Emergency, In Case of
Brake Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . 147
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Engine
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . 47
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . 249,250
Compartment Identification . . . . 249,250
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
313
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252,273
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . 252,253,273
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . 253
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . 36
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . 16
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . 48,256
Exterior Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Fabric Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265,266
Fabric Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
314
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Flashers
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50,146
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . 181
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Fluid Level Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . 262
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 263
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . 274
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Fold and Tumble Rear Seat . . . . . . . . 80
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Folding Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Four Wheel Drive Operation . . . . . . . 194
Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . 238
Front Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . 264
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Filler Cap (Gas
Gasoline . . .
Gauge . . . .
Octane Rating
Requirements
Tank Capacity
Fuses . . . . . .
Cap)
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . .
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . .
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . .
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Odometer . . . . . . . . .
Speedometer . . . . . . .
Tachometer . . . . . . . .
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . .
Gear Select Lever Override .
General Information . . . . .
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . .
Glow Plug Light . . . . . . .
Gross Axle Weight Rating . .
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
226
224
146
224
273
273
268
. . 226,227,251
. . . . . . . 225
. . . . . . . 224
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . . 149
. . . . . 146
. . . . . 150
. . . . . 146
. . . . . 148
186,188,191
. . . . . 244
. . . . 15,17
. . . . . 266
. . . . . 154
. . . . . 227
. . . . . 227
Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect™)
. . . . . 57
Hard Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Hard Top, Modular . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Hard Top Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . 238
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Headlights
Dimmer Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Leveling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . 216
Hill Start Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Hydraulic Clutch Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . 14
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Inflation Pressure Tires . . . . . . . . . . 217
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . 158
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . 143
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . 266
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . 268
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . 265
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . 88
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 239,240
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Key, Programming . . .
Key, Replacement . . . .
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer)
Key-In Reminder . . . .
Keyless Entry System . .
Keys . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
15
14
14
13
16
13
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . 146
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Lap Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42,44
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Leveling, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50,83
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35,38,49,148
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Anti-Lock Warning . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . 215
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Check Engine (Malfunction
Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . 85
Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153,215
Electronic Throttle Control Warning . . 153
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . 148
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Glow Plug Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . 238
315
Headlight Leveling . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . 147
Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . 216
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . 149
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . 149
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . 150
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . 153,215
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . 50,84,146
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Warning (Instrument Cluster
Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Locking Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Locks
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
316
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42,44
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . 221
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . 83
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . 254
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . 251
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . 278,290
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check
Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . 185,263
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . 261
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Methanol Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . 154,160
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . 8
Modular Hard Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . 47
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . 224
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150,154
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149,150,154
Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road) . . . . . 198
Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) . . . . . 198
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . 152,160,290
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . 152,160,290
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . 146
Recommendation . . . . . . . 252,253,273
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253,273
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . 251
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . 6
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . 56
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Overdrive OFF Switch . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . 149,238
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . 6
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Paint Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect™) . . . . . 57
Polishing and Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Power
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205,206
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . 31
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . 239
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . 162
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . 164
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . 264
Rear Swing Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . 140
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . 140
Rear Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral
(N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral
(N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Release, Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Remote Control
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . 16
Remote Sound System (Radio)
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . 160
Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38,41
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . 49
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . 50
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . 278,290
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25,49
Adjustable Upper Shoulder
Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . 31
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38,46
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
317
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . 28
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Fold and Tumble Rear . . . . . . . . . . 80
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Security Against Theft . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . 15
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . 14
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . 15
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 188,191
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 185
Transfer Case, Shifting into Transfer
Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Transfer Case, Shifting out of
Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . 236
Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage . . . . . . 28
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
318
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Side Window Demisters (Defrosters) . . . 173
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . 50,84,146
Soft Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105,119
Sound Systems (Radio) . . . . . . . . . . 164
Sound Systems . Refer to the Sound Systems
Booklet
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . 90
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . 180
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . 181
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 180
Steering
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205,206
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Wheel Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . 164
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound
System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93,271
Storage, Behind the Seat . . . . . . . . . . 94
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 172,271
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Sunrider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133,135
Supplemental Restraint System Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Sway Bar Disconnect, Electronic . . . . . 197
Swing Gate, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . 168
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . 149
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . 42
Theft System Disarming . . . . . . . . . . 16
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Tip Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180,182
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50,217
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . 217
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239,240
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . 221
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . 150
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . 219
To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . 230
Torque Converter Clutch . . . . . . . 191,193
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227,245
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Towing Eyes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Trac-Lok Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Traction Control Light . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . 215
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . 233
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . 230
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . 230
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Four-Wheel-Drive Operation . . . . . . 194
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188,191
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 262,263
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Range Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote
Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Trip Odometer Reset Button . . . . . . . 149
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84,146
Uconnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . 57
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . 28
Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . 8
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . 8
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . 172,271
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . 74
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Waxing and Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . 265
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . 265
Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Windshield Defroster . . . . . 49,166,167,171
Windshield, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . 87,256
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . 256
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Wiper, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
319
320
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement